SD-V594SC DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER SERVICE MANUAL

FILE NO. 810-200612GRI
INTERNAL PUBLICATION
SERVICE MANUAL
DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO
CASSETTE RECORDER
SD-V594SC
The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.
This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green
product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).
For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.
DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, April, 2006 GREEN
(*1)
GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling
and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of
certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any
marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.
Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation
recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to
enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this,
Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products,
parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.
Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in
manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.
(*2)
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer
products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in
the servicing and repair of this product.
WARNING
This product is manufactured using lead free solder.
DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !
The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F
(30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made
with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great
care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product  especially
when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs  as the level of heat
required to melt lead-free solder is high.
Introduction
2
Connections
DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO
CASSETTE RECORDER
SD-V594SC
OWNER’S MANUAL
ColorStream and ColorStream Pro are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
16
Basic setup
(VCR)
27
Playback
(VCR)
34
Recording
(VCR)
39
Other functions
(VCR)
44
Basic playback
(DVD)
47
Advanced
playback
(DVD)
50
Function setup
(DVD)
63
Others
71
©2006 Toshiba Corporation
Printed in Thailand
This device does not tape-record copy protected DVD Video Discs.
Introduction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, do not expose this appliance to rain
or moisture.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN
EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN
BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.
ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA
FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.
FCC NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the partly responsible for compliance with the
FCC Rules could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
CAUTION: THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.
TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS USER'S GUIDE CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION.
USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED.
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1. READ INSTRUCTIONS
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.
2. RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
3. HEED WARNINGS
All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
4. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
5. CLEANING
Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a soft dry cloth for cleaning the exterior cabinet only.
6. ATTACHMENTS
The manufacturer of this unit does not make any recommendations for attachments, as they may cause
hazards.
7. WATER AND MOISTURE
Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet
basement, or near a swimming pool.
PORTABLE CART WARNING
(symbol provided by RETAC)
8. ACCESSORIES
Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table.
The unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit.
8A. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops,
excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart
combination to overturn.
9. VENTILATION
Slots and openings in the cabinet back or bottom are provided for ventilation,
S3125A
to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating.
These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit
on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat
source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper
ventilation is provided and/or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
10. POWER SOURCE
This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not
sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company.
11. GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION
This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the
other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to
insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your
electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.
12. POWER-CORD PROTECTION
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed
upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the appliance.
Introduction
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence
of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to persons.
Location of the required Marking
The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.
2
CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.
3
Introduction
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS / Power source
13. LIGHTNING
To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time,
unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the
unit due to lightning and power line surges.
14. POWER LINES
An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric
light or power circuits, or where it can fall onto or against such power lines or circuits. When installing an
outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits,
as contact with them might be fatal.
15. OVERLOADING
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
16. OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY
Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short
out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.
17. OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is
grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the
National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for
the grounding electrode.
19. REPLACEMENT PARTS
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by
the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
20. SAFETY CHECK
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.
21. HEAT
The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
22. DISC TRAY
Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.
23. CONNECTING
When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from
the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause a product damage. Read the owner's manual of the other
equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.
24. LASER BEAM
Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the
laser beam. It may cause sight damage.
25. DISC
Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious
personal injury and product malfunction.
26. NOTE TO CABLE TV SYSTEM INSTALLER
This reminder is provided to call the Cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
Introduction
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
GROUND CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
ELECTRIC SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A
Power source
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
TO USE AC POWER SOURCE
Use the AC polarized line cord provided for operation on AC. Insert
the AC cord plug into a standard 120V 60Hz polarized AC outlet.
AC Outlet
Wider Hole
and Blade
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
18. SERVICING
Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous
voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
For example:
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.
c. If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that
are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage
and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal operation.
e. If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f . When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.
Notes:
• Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified
voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only.
• If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC
outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s
responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.
• If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the
unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet
and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation.
Polarized AC Cord Plug
(One blade is wider than the other.)
4
5
Introduction
Precautions
Notes and Informations
On handling discs
When shipping the DVD/VCR, the original shipping
carton and packing materials come in handy. For
maximum protection, repack the unit as it was
originally packed at the factory.
Do not use volatile liquids, such as insect spray, near
the DVD/VCR. Do not leave rubber or plastic
products to contact the DVD/VCR for a prolonged
period. They will leave marks on the finish.
The top and rear panels of the DVD/VCR may
become warm after a long period of use. This is not a
malfunction.
When the DVD/VCR is not in use, be sure to remove
the disc and the video cassette turn off the power.
If you do not use the DVD/VCR for a long period, the
unit may not function properly in the future. Turn on
and use the DVD/VCR occasionally.
Notes on locating
Place the DVD/VCR on a level surface. Do not use it
on a shaky or unstable surface such as a wobbling
table or inclined stand. The loaded disc or the video
tape may become dis-aligned and damage the DVD/
VCR.
When you place this DVD/VCR near a TV, radio, or
VCR, the playback picture may become poor and the
sound may be distorted. In this case, place the DVD/
VCR away from the TV, radio or VCR.
Note on moisture condensation
Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you
pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops of
water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way,
moisture may condense on the head drum or the optical
pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial
internal parts of the DVD/VCR.
le of mo
Examp ensat isture
ion!
cond
Tape
Head drum
Disc Mark
When you bring the DVD/VCR directly from a cold
place to a warm place.
When you use the DVD/VCR in a room where you
just turned on the heater, or a place where the cold
wind from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.
In summer, when you use the DVD/VCR in a hot and
humid place just after you move the unit from an air
conditioned room.
When you use the DVD/VCR in a humid place.
It’s too
warm!
If you use the DVD/VCR in such a situation, it may
damage discs and internal parts. Remove the disc or
the video tape, connect the power cord of the DVD/
VCR to the wall outlet, turn on the DVD/VCR, and
leave it for two or three hours. After two or three
hours, the DVD/VCR will have warmed up and
evaporated any moisture. Keep the DVD/VCR
connected to the wall outlet and moisture
condensation will seldom occur.
Wall outlet
Disc
Size
Approx. 4 hours
(single sided disc)
Approx. 160 minutes
(double sided disc)
Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and
sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center
outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc
clean.
Video
CDs
Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,
benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic
spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.
On storing discs
Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight
or near heat sources.
Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and
dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.
Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing
objects on discs outside of their case may cause
warping.
Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the
titles are sub-divided into chapters. VIDEO CDs and
audio CDs are divided into tracks.
DVD video disc
Title 1
Title 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Video CD/Audio CD
Video CD/Audio CD
Track 2
Track 3
Approx. 80 minutes
(single sided disc)
8 cm
On cleaning discs
Track 1
Approx. 8 hours
(double sided disc)
Audio
+
Video
(moving
pictures)
DVD
video
discs
DVD video disc
Maximum
playback time
12 cm
Do not attach paper or tape to discs.
Structure of disc contents
Do not use the DVD/VCR when moisture
condensation may occur.
Contents
Playback side
Moisture condensation occurs during the
following cases.
Wa
it!
6
This DVD/VCR can play the following discs.
Moisture condensation damages the DVD/VCR.
Please read the following carefully.
Notes on cleaning
Use a soft, dry cloth for cleaning.
Use a dry cloth to wipe.
Do not use any type of solvent, such as thinner and
benzine, as they may damage the surface of the
DVD/VCR.
If you use a chemical saturated cloth to clean the unit,
follow that product’s instructions.
Playable discs
Do not touch the playback side of the disc.
Introduction
Notes on handling
Track 4
Track 5
Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which
is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track
number” respectively.
There may be discs that do not have these numbers.
Audio
CDs
DIGITAL VIDEO
Audio
+
Video
(moving
pictures)
12 cm
Approx. 74 minutes
(single sided disc)
8 cm
Approx. 20 minutes
(single sided disc)
12 cm
Approx. 74 minutes
(single sided disc)
8 cm
Approx. 20 minutes
(single sided disc)
Audio
The following discs are also available.
DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format
CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX format
Kodak picture CD, FUJICOLOR CD format
Some of these discs may be incompatible.
• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.
• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, Photo
CD, etc., or non standardized discs even if they may be
labeled as above.
• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending on
the recording conditions.
• This DVD/VCR uses the NTSC color system, and
cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other
color system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).
Because of problems and errors that can occur during
the creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the
manufacture of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot
assure that the DVD player will successfully play every
disc bearing DVD and CD logos. If you happen to
experience any difficulty playing a DVD and/or CD disc
on this DVD player, please contact Toshiba Customer
Service.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
7
Introduction
Contents
Notes and Informations (Continued)
Notes on region numbers
About this owner’s manual
On Video CDs
The following symbol may appear on the TV screen
during operation.
This DVD/VCR supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC
(Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of Playback
Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on
types of discs.
It means that the operation is not permitted by the DVD/
VCR or the disc.
For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the
playback of copyright message of the disc when the
STOP ( ) button is pressed. Alternatively, this symbol
may also indicate that the feature is not available for the
disc.
• Video CD not equipped with PBC function
(Version 1.1)
Sound and movie can be played on this DVD/VCR in the
same way as an audio CD.
• Video CD equipped with PBC function
(Version 2.0)
In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with the
PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software
with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV
screen (Menu Playback). Some of the functions described in
this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision
of copyrighted materials including, without limitation,
television programs, videotapes, and DVDs is prohibited
under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other
countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal
liability.
This unit is compatible with USB memory devices that accept Mass
Storage Class (referred to as USB Mass Storage in this owner’s
manual). Please note that this does not guarantee that the unit is
compatible with any kind of USB Mass Storage.
This unit can be used to read JPEG, WMA, MP3 and DivX® data
for the equipment shown in the table below. However, please note
that it is not possible to guarantee that all functions are available
and some functions may not work properly for some equipment.
This unit cannot playback the DivX® VOD content protected by
DRM (Digital Rights Management) system on the USB Mass
Storage.
This unit is compatible with Nikon COOLPIX P2 and FUJIFILM
FinePix A345 digital cameras. However, successful connection
depends on the version of the software installed in the camera
and the memory capacity and connection status.
This unit cannot be used to read data from equipment not listed
below.
Please refer to “Connecting to a USB Mass Storage” $ for details
of how to connect a USB Mass Storage and the necessary
precautions when using the unit.
Equipment
Memory Card
Reader
Digital Camera
USB Memory
MP3 Player
8
Brand
Models
San Disk
ZIO
GE
Nikon
FUJIFILM
Lexar
San Disk
PNY
SAMSUNG
Sony
RCA
SDDR-89
CM-28100
HO97949
COOLPIX P2
FinePix A345
JDA1GB-275
SDCZ2-512-A10
PFD01GU20RF
YP-T7Z
NW-E507
RD2780
Basic playback (DVD)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................ 2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .......................... 3
Power source ................................................... 5
Precautions ...................................................... 6
Notes and Informations .................................... 7
Contents. .......................................................... 9
Identification of controls ................................. 10
Multi brand remote control ............................. 14
Playing a disc ................................................. 47
Connections
Antenna connections ...................................... 16
Cable TV connections .................................... 18
Connecting to a TV ........................................ 20
Connecting to an audio equipment ................ 24
Connecting to a USB Mass Storage .............. 26
Basic setup (VCR)
Notes on copyright
Playable USB Mass Storages
Introduction
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
Consumers should note that not all high definition
television sets are fully compatible with this product and
may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In
case of 525 progressive scan picture problems, it is
recommended that the user switch the connection to the
“STANDARD DEFINITION” output. If there are questions
regarding our TV set compatibility with this model 525p
DVD player, please contact our customer service center.
Setting the video channel ............................... 27
Setting the language ...................................... 28
Clock setting ................................................... 29
Tuner setting .................................................. 32
Playback (VCR)
Loading and unloading a cassette tape ......... 34
Cassette tape playback .................................. 35
Special playback ............................................ 36
Convenience function ..................................... 37
Recording (VCR)
Advanced playback (DVD)
Zooming ......................................................... 50
Locating desired scene .................................. 50
Marking desired scenes ................................. 51
Repeat playback ............................................ 52
A-B Repeat playback ..................................... 52
Program playback .......................................... 53
Random playback .......................................... 53
Changing angles ............................................ 54
Title selection ................................................. 54
DVD menu ...................................................... 54
Changing soundtrack language ..................... 55
Setting surround sound .................................. 55
Subtitles ......................................................... 56
To turn off the PBC ......................................... 56
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD
operation ........................................................ 57
Introduction
This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions of
this DVD/VCR. Some DVD video discs are produced in
a manner that allows specific or limited operation during
playback. As such, the DVD/VCR may not respond to all
operating commands. This is not a defect in the DVD/
VCR. Refer to instruction notes of discs.
The region number of this DVD/VCR is 1. If region numbers, which
stand for their playable area, are printed on your DVD video
disc and you do not find 1 or ALL , disc playback will not be
allowed by the player. (In this case, the DVD/VCR will display a
message on-screen.)
Function setup (DVD)
Customizing the function settings .................. 63
Temporary disabling of rating level by
DVD disc ........................................................ 70
Others
Language code list ......................................... 71
Troubleshooting ............................................. 72
Specifications ................................................. 73
Canadian warranty information ...................... 74
Recording a TV program ................................ 39
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) ................ 41
Timer recording .............................................. 42
Other functions (VCR)
Stereo recording and playback ...................... 44
Second Audio Program (SAP) ........................ 44
Duplicating a video tape ................................. 45
Recording a DVD/CD disc .............................. 46
9
Introduction
Identification of controls
See the page in
Display window
for details.
Play indicator
VCR/DVD mode selector
button %
ON/STANDBY button
DVD mode indicator "%
REC button !'
%
Cassette loading slot 34
Still indicator
DVD disc inserted indicator
Recording
indicator
(VCR)
OPEN/CLOSE button "%
FWD button !#
Introduction
VCR indicator (VCR)
Front panel
CD inserted
indicator
Disc tray "%
Remote sensor !
Multifunctional indicator
Track indicator (CD)
Tape loaded indicator (VCR)
Progressive indicator
AM/PM indicator
(AM is not displayed)
Timer Recording indicator (VCR)
VCR operation status
EJECT
button 34
VCR mode indicator
CHANNEL
Display window 11
AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO IN
(LINE IN 2) jacks "#
Rear panel
DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack
DVD S-VIDEO OUT jack
HDMI OUT jack
%
PLAY button !#
buttons !'
/
"
USB Port
$
REV button !#
Press CALL to display VCR operation status on the screen.
To cancel the display, press CALL again.
While watching TV
HI-FI STEREO
CLOCK
When connecting the optical digital cable, remove
the cap and fit the connector into the jack firmly.
When not using the jack, keep the cap inserted
to protect it from dust intrusion.
DVD/VCR common AUDIO
(L/R)/VIDEO OUT jacks STEREO AND
SECOND
AUDIO
PROGRAM
(SAP)
VCR Icons
While operating a tape
DAY OF THE WEEK
STOP button !#
8 : 47AM MON
STEREO SAP
CH 125
CHANNEL
Recording :
OPERATING
MODE
8 : 30AM MON
HI-FI
Rec/Pause :
Play :
AUTO REPEAT
00 : 00 : 00 SP
TAPE SPEED
REAL TIME COUNTER
STEREO
00 : 15 : 12 SP
TAPE IN
Stop :
Eject :
OUTPUT SELECTION
ANT IN jack $
Disc operation status
Press DISPLAY, the status display of the disc will appear on the screen as follows.
To cancel the display, press DISPLAY again.
DVD
VCD
DISC OPERATION
TITLE NO.
DVD
Title 1/3
1/1 Eng Dolby Digital
1/1
ANGLE NO.
AC power cord
#
DVD AUDIO (L/R)
DVD COMPONENT
OUT jacks OUT jacks DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT jack
10
"
ELAPSED
TIME
TOTAL
TIME
00:15:25 01:41:39
Chapter 2/24
1/2 Eng
DISC OPERATION
CHAPTER
NO.
VCD
Track 3/15
ELAPSED TOTAL
TIME
TIME
00:08:32 00:51:03
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
TRACK NO.
ANT OUT jack $
AUDIO LANGUAGE
A KIND OF AUDIO
AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO
IN (LINE IN1) jacks "#
11
Introduction
Identification of controls (Continued)
The instructions in this manual describe the functions on the remote control. See the page in
for details.
Inserting batteries
DVD/VCR button 13
* TV button 14
/
Open the battery compartment cover in the direction of
the arrow.
2
Install two “AAA” batteries
(supplied), paying attention to the
polarity diagram in the battery
compartment.
3
Replace the compartment
cover.
* Direct channel selection
buttons (0-9) 13
Number buttons (0-9) 14
button 14
ZERO RETURN button 37
JUMP button 50
* 100 button 14
* VOL +/- buttons 14
CM SKIP button 36
ZOOM button 50
Caution:
* INPUT SELECT button 14
TOP MENU button 54 59
Never throw batteries into a fire.
PROGRAM button 14
Direction buttons (
/ / / ) 13
SET+/- buttons 28
Notes:
• Be sure to use AAA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with
applicable laws and regulations.
• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with
new ones.
• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones. Never mix
battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.
• Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an
extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.
DVD
DVD MENU button 54 59
* ENTER button 28 63
CH+/- buttons 13
CANCEL button 31
CLEAR button 50
RETURN button 63 70
STOP button 35 47
PLAY button 35 47
FWD button 35 49
PAUSE/STILL button 36 48
SKIP
button 49
VISS + button 38
REV button 35 49
FWD
SKIP
button 49
VISS - button 38
Remote control basics
SLOW button 36 49
VCR MENU button 28
SETUP button 63
CLOCK/COUNTER button 38
HDMI button 22
MARKER button 51
COUNTER RESET button 37
ANGLE button 54 59
1
* POWER button 13
CABLE BOX button 15
CALL button 11
* DISPLAY button 11
* CH
Introduction
Remote control
AUDIO SELECT button 44
AUDIO button 55
USB
DVD/VCR SELECT button 27 47
ATR button 36
SUBTITLE button 56
TV/VCR button 27
REC/OTR button 39 41
SP/SLP button 39
PLAYMODE button 52
TIMER REC button 42
DVD/USB button 58
A-B RPT button 52
EJECT button (VCR) 34
OPEN/CLOSE (DVD) 47
DVD MENU button
Use the MENU button to display the menu included on
many DVD video discs. To operate a menu, follow the
instructions in “DVD Menu.” #"
*TV control buttons
The various brands of TV listed on page 14 can be operated
with this remote control. There may be some TV models that
cannot be operated with this remote control. If this is the case,
use the original remote control supplied with the TV.
•CABLE BOX control buttons
The various brands of CABLE BOX listed on page 15 can
be operated with this remote control. There may be some
CABLE BOX models that cannot be operated with this
remote control. If this is the case, use the original remote
control supplied with the CABLE BOX.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press POWER to turn the DVD/VCR on or off.
• Select your desired operating mode (DVD or VCR) using DVD/VCR SELECT.
(DVD or VCR indicator on the front panel will show you which mode is selected.)
• Press CH + or CH – to move through the channels one channel at a time.
• The / / / are also used to navigate on-screen menu system.
• You can directly access specific channels using Direct channel selection buttons (0–9).
• Each press of DVD/VCR SELECT on the remote control, switches the screen between the VCR screen (VCR mode)
and the DVD screen (DVD mode).
Operation
• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to
operate.
• Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote
sensor, up to a distance of approx. 7 meters.
Approx. 7 meters
12
13
Introduction
This remote control can be compatible with various brands of TV/
Cable box/DSS® satellite receiver by setting their control codes. The
TOSHIBA code has initially been set to control TOSHIBA TVs.
Setting Cable box/DSS® satellite
receiver control codes
1
Press CABLE BOX to set the remote control
operating your Cable box/DSS® satellite receiver.
2
While holding down PROGRAM, enter the two
digits of your Cable box/DSS® satellite receiver
brand code (listed on the right) using Number
buttons (0–9), then release PROGRAM.
Table of Cable box brand codes
Brand name of
your cable box
Toshiba
Anvision
Archer
Setting TV control codes
1
2
Press TV to set the remote control operating
your TV.
While holding down PROGRAM, enter the two
digits of your TV's brand code (listed on the
right) using Number buttons (0–9), then release
PROGRAM.
Point the remote control at your TV and use each button
listed below to make sure that your TV is operated
correctly.
POWER
?
CH M/?
VOL +/–
INPUT SELECT
Direct channel
selection buttons
(0-9)
100
DISPLAY
ENTER
To turn the TV on or off.
To select TV channels in the upper
or lower direction.
To adjust the sound level.
To select an external source such
as a VCR.
To select TV channels. When selecting channels 1 to 9, first enter 0 and
then desired number.
To substitute for 100 channel key.
To turn TV’s screen display on or
off.
To use for the TV’s ENTER key.
Important
Some TV’s may not respond to all the operations above,
or may not be operated at all with this remote control. In
this case, operate your TV with its own remote control.
Notes:
• For some brands, several control codes (brand codes) are allocated. Try each of them until the buttons work on your TV.
• If you replace the remote control’s batteries, set the brand code
again.
14
Table of TV brand codes
Brand name
of your TV
Brand Code
Brand name
of your TV
Brand Code
Toshiba
01
Penney
01, 02, 07, 11, 12
Bell & Howell
09
Philco
10
Carver
10
Philips
10
Celebrity
03
Pioneer
16
Citizen
12
Princeclub
12
Curtis Mathes 09, 12
Prism
07
Dumont
14
Proscan
02
Electro band
03
Proton
11
Emerson
09,11
Pulser
14
Fisher
09
Quasar
07, 15
GE
02, 07, 11
Radio Shack
13
Gibralter
14
RCA
02
Goldstar
11
Realistic
09, 11, 13
Hallmark
11
Runco(NEC)
Hitachi
06
Samsung
11, 12
Infinity
10
Sanyo
09
JBL
10
Scotch
11
JCB
03
Scott
11
JVC
05
Sears
01, 02, 09, 10, 11
LXI
14
01, 02, 09, 10, 11
Sharp
08, 13
Magnavox
10
Sony
03
Marantz
10
Soundesign
11
Megatron
06, 11
Supreme
03
Memorex
04, 09, 11
Sylvania
MGA
04, 11
Tandy
08
Midland
02,07, 14
Technics
07, 15
Mitsubishi
04, 11
Techwood
07
Motorola
08
Teknika
04,10,12
MTC
12
TMK
11
NAD
01, 11
Victor
05
Nikko
11
Vidikron
10
Optimus
09
Vidtech
11
Optonica
08
Wards
10, 11,13
Panasonic
07, 10, 15
Zenith
14
10
Cablestar
Cableview
Citizen
Curtis
Diamond
Point the remote control at your Cable box/DSS®
satellite receiver and use each button listed below to
make sure that your Cable box/DSS® satellite receiver
is operated correctly.
To turn the Cable box/DSS® satellite receiver on or off.
To select cable/satellite channels in
the upper or lower direction. (Not
applicable to some brands of cable
box/satellite receiver.)
Number buttons (0–9) To select desired channels to record.
ENTER
To use for the Cable box’s ENTER key.
POWER
?
CH M/?
Eagle
Eastern
GC Brand
Gemini
General
Instrument
Hamlin
(Some cable boxes require you to use 100 button as the
enter button.)
Important
Some Cable box/DSS® satellite receiver may not respond
to all the operations above, or may not be operated at all
with this remote control. In this case, operate them with
its own remote control.
Notes:
• For some brands, several control codes (brand codes) are allocated. Try each of them until the buttons work on your Cable
box/DSS® satellite receiver.
• If you replace the remote control’s batteries, set the brand code
again.
Hitachi
Jerrold
Macom
Magnavox
Movietime
NSC
OAK
OAK Sigma
Panasonic
Brand Code
36
13, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24,
25, 26, 58,
62, 84
1, 20, 21,
29, 42, 44,
63, 88, 91
13, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24,
25, 26, 58,
62, 84
30, 42, 44,
52, 63, 88
30, 42, 44,
52, 63, 88
8, 9, 56, 61
1, 20, 21,
29, 42, 44,
63, 88, 91
13, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24,
25, 26, 58,
62, 84
26, 28
30, 42, 44,
52, 63, 88
4, 30, 85
1, 2, 3,
4, 31, 34,
55, 83, 85,
91
14, 15, 28,
41
31, 79, 80
1, 2, 3,
4, 31, 34,
55, 85, 91
31, 79, 80
13, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24,
25, 26, 58,
62, 84
29, 32, 38,
39, 42, 44,
88
29, 32, 38,
39, 42, 44,
88
10, 11, 12,
13, 46
10, 11, 12,
13, 46
6, 8, 16, 17
Brand name of
your cable box
Philips
Brand Code
4, 13, 20,
21, 22, 23,
24, 25, 26,
58, 62, 84
Pioneer
5, 6, 78
Pulsar
30, 42, 44,
52, 63, 88
Randtek
13, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24,
25, 26, 58,
62, 84
RCA
6, 8, 16, 17
Realistic
44, 88
Regal
14, 23, 41,
84
Regency
26, 28
Rembrandt
29, 32, 38,
39, 42, 44,
88
Samsung
4, 6, 32,
42, 78
Scientific Atlanta 8, 9, 56, 61
Sheritech
27
SL Mark
4, 6, 32,
42, 78
Sprucher
6, 8, 16, 17
Stargate
4, 6, 30, 32,
42, 44, 52,
63, 78, 88
Sylvania
19
Teknika
74
Telecaption
77
Teleview
4, 6, 32,
42, 78
Texscan
18, 19
Tocom
1, 33, 34,
42, 48, 49,
73, 91
Unica
1, 20, 21,
29, 42, 44,
63, 88, 91
Universal
29, 42, 43,
44, 52, 63,
82, 88
Videoway
7, 23, 45,
50, 84
Viewstar
13, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24,
25, 26, 58,
62, 84
Warner Amex 6
Zenith
7, 23, 45,
50, 84
Introduction
POWER
TV
0–9
100
DISPLAY
INPUT SELECT
PROGRAM
VOL +/–
ENTER
?
CH M/?
Multi brand remote control
Table of DSS® satellite receiver brand codes
Brand name
Toshiba
RCA
Sony
Magnavox
Brand code
99
98
97
95, 96
Brand name
Draker
Primestar
Hitachi
Panasonic
Brand code
94
93
92, 89
90
15
Connections
Antenna connections
If you are using an antenna system, follow these instructions. If you are a Cable TV subscriber, skip ahead to page
for the proper connections.
&
After you have connected the antenna to the DVD/VCR, you must connect the DVD/VCR to the TV.
Below are 3 common methods of connecting your DVD/VCR to a TV. Find the type of TV you are using and follow the
connection diagram.
Antenna to DVD/VCR connection
The DVD/VCR must be connected “between” the antenna and the TV. First, disconnect the antenna from the TV and
connect it to the DVD/VCR. Then connect the DVD/VCR to the TV. Below are 3 common methods of connecting an
antenna system to a DVD/VCR. Find the type of antenna system you are using and follow the connection diagram.
This DVD/VCR has a single 75 ohm output for connection to a TV. If your TV has separate VHF and UHF antenna
inputs (numbers 2 and 3 below), use a splitter to connect the DVD/VCR to the TV for VHF and UHF reception.
Connections
1
DVD/VCR to TV connection
Combination VHF/UHF Antenna with 75 ohm Coaxial Cable
DVD/VCR
TV
Note:
If a VHF or UHF antenna is used,
set the TV/CABLE menu option to
the “TV” mode.
VHF/UHF IN
75 ohm Coaxial Cable (supplied)
75 ohm Coaxial Cable
TV with single 75 ohm VHF/UHF antenna
input
Combination VHF/UHF Antenna with 300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire
2
DVD/VCR
TV
Note:
Matching Transformer 300 ohm Input 75
ohm output (not supplied)
Splitter 75 ohm Input
75/300 ohm outputs
(not supplied)
75 ohm Coaxial Cable
(supplied)
If a VHF or UHF antenna is used,
set the TV/CABLE menu option
UHF
to the “TV” mode.
VHF
TV with 300 ohm UHF and 75 ohm VHF
300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire
(not supplied)
3
antenna inputs
DVD/VCR
Separate VHF and UHF Antennas
TV
UHF
VHF
UHF
Combiner 75/300 ohm Inputs 75 ohm output
(not supplied)
300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire
(not supplied)
Splitter 75 ohm Input
300 ohm outputs
(not supplied)
75 ohm Coaxial Cable
(supplied)
Note:
If a VHF or UHF antenna is used,
set the TV/CABLE menu option to
the “TV” mode.
VHF
TV with 300 ohm UHF and 300 ohm VHF
antenna inputs
75 ohm Coaxial Cable
Note: If both VHF and UHF antennas have 300 ohm twin lead (flat) wires, use a combiner having two 300 ohm inputs and
one 75 ohm output.
Notes: • A clear picture will not be obtained by the DVD/VCR unless the antenna signal is good. Connect the antenna to the
DVD/VCR properly.
• For better quality recording, an indoor antenna or a telescopic antenna is not recommended. The use of an outdoor
type antenna is required.
• If you are not sure about the connection, please refer to qualified service personnel.
16
17
Connections
Cable TV connections
Many cable companies offer services permitting reception of extra channels including pay or subscription channels. This
DVD/VCR has an extended tuning range and can be tuned to most cable channels without using a cable company
supplied converter box, except for those premium channels which are intentionally scrambled. If you subscribe to a
premium channel which is scrambled, you must have a descrambler box for proper reception.
This DVD/VCR cannot receive scrambled programs since it does not contain a descrambler. In order to receive scrambled programs, your existing descrambler must be used. Descrambler boxes are available from cable companies. Consult your local cable company for more information concerning connection to their descrambler equipment. There are
many ways to connect your DVD/VCR to a cable system. Below are six common methods of connection.
4
DVD/VCR
DVD/VCR
TV
Splitter
TV
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
Incoming Cable
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
A
B
Incoming Cable
Converter/Descrambler
Allows: *
*
*
Prevents: *
Allows: * Recording of nonscrambled channels.
* Use of the programmable timer.
* Recording of one channel while watching another.
2
A/B Switch
Connections
1
IMPORTANT: Make sure the TV/CABLE menu option is set to the “CABLE” mode.
Recording of one channel while watching another.
Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.
Recording of all channels through the converter box.
Watching scrambled channels while recording another channel.
* Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.
DVD/VCR
TV
Converter/
Descrambler
DVD/VCR
5
TV
Splitter
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
Converter/Descrambler
Incoming
Cable
Incoming Cable
A/B Switch
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
A
B
Allows: * Recording of channels through the converter box
(scrambled and unscrambled).
* Using the programmable timer to record only the
channel selected at the converter box.
Note:
To record from converter/descrambler, DVD/
VCR tuner must be tuned to the converter
output channel, usually channel 3 or 4.
Prevents: * Recording one channel while watching another.
* Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.
Allows: *
*
*
*
Prevents:
Recording of nonscrambled channels.
Recording of one channel while watching another.
Watching premium channels through the converter while recording nonscrambled channels.
Using the programmable timer.
Recording scrambled channels.
DVD/VCR
3
DVD/VCR
TV
Converter/Descrambler
6
TV
Splitter
Converter/Descrambler
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
Incoming Cable
Converter/Descrambler
Incoming Cable
A/B Switch
A
B
Allows: * Recording of nonscrambled channels.
* Use of the programmable timer.
* Recording an unscrambled channel while watching
any channel selected at the converter box.
Prevents:
Recording scrambled channels.
Note:
If you are playing a tape or using the tuner
built into the DVD/VCR, the converter must
be set to the video channel output of the DVD/
VCR (either 3 or 4).
Allows: * Recording of all channels through the converter box.
* Recording a scrambled or unscrambled channel while watching another (scrambled or
unscrambled) channel.
* Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.
Prevents: Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.
Note: Whenever a Converter/Descrambler box is placed before the DVD/VCR, you must tune the DVD/VCR to the output of
the Converter/Descrambler box, usually channel 3 or 4.
18
19
Connections
S-video output
Connecting to a TV
An S-Video connection is superior to Video (Yellow) output. Use this method for DVD playback when the connected television has SVideo input, and does not have component video inputs.
Connect the DVD/VCR to your TV.
Component video outputs
Basic connection
Connecting to an audio system and TV equipped with S-video input/component video inputs
Connections
Note: This method transports VHS and DVD-video signals. For enhanced DVD-video performance, we recommend you to
connect the S-video or ColorStream® component video outputs to your TV/monitor also. PROGRESSIVE outputs
Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs that are capable of reproducing a progressively scanned video
signal. Connecting to these inputs allows you to view the highest quality pictures with less flicker.
INTERLACED outputs
Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs. Connecting to these inputs allows you to enjoy the highest quality
DVD picture playback.
Notes:
• To switch the scan mode between the interlace and progressive modes, see page 69 .
• In some TVs or monitors, the color levels of the playback picture may be reduced slightly or the tint may change. In such a case,
adjust the TV or monitor for optimum performance.
The S-video output and component video output transports the DVD-video signal exclusively and will deliver enhanced DVD
video picture performance.
Signal flow
Signal flow
To ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
(white)
To S-VIDEO
OUT
(red)
If you connect the DVD/VCR to
your TV with the DVD OUT jacks,
select the corresponding video
input on your television to watch
DVD video discs.
To wall outlet
(yellow) (red)
To wall outlet
To VIDEO
OUT
(white)
S-video cable
(not supplied)
To ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Audio/video cable (supplied)
• Actual
labels for
component
video inputs To PR/CR
may vary
VIDEO
depending OUT
on the TV
manufacturer (ex. Y,
R-Y, B-Y or
Y, CB, CR).
(red)
(yellow)
To Y
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
OUT
(white)
To Y video input
On-screen display
Select:
Page
“Digital Out”
“PCM” or “Bitstream”
$%
TV or monitor with
audio/video inputs
Notes:
• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected TV as well.
• When you connect the DVD/VCR to your TV, be sure to turn off the power and unplug both units from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• If your television set has one audio input, connect the left and right audio outputs of the DVD/VCR to a Y cable adapter
(not supplied) and then connect to your TV.
• Connect the DVD/VCR directly to your TV. If you connect the DVD/VCR to a VCR, TV/VCR combination or video selector,
the playback picture may be distorted as DVD video discs are copy protected.
• While HDMI is being output in the DVD mode, it is impossible to output from the Video out jack, S-video out jack or
Component video out jacks.
20
To audio inputs of
the amplifier
To S-video input TV or monitor with
component video inputs
On-screen display
Select:
Page
“Digital Out”
“PCM” or “Bitstream”
$%
(white)
(red)
To PR/CR video input
• Make sure following setting.
• Make sure following setting.
Audio cable (not supplied)
To PB/CB video input
Component
video cable
(not supplied)
To audio inputs
To video input
To PB/CB
Audio system
Notes:
• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• When you connect the DVD/VCR to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from
the wall outlet before making any connections.
• If you place the DVD/VCR near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the DVD/
VCR away from the tuner and radio.
• The output sound of the DVD/VCR has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate
listening level. Otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.
• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the DVD/VCR’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier power on, the
speakers may be damaged.
• While HDMI is being output in the DVD mode, it is impossible to output from the Video out jack, S-video out jack or
Component video out jacks.
• When connecting to a TV using the S-video jack, make sure that the Progressive indicator “ ” on the display
window is not lit. If it is lit, the S-video outputs do not feed the correct signals and you cannot see any picture. To
turn off the Progressive indicator, select Interlaced output 69 .
21
Connections
Connecting to a TV (Continued)
About HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video
and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players,
DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed
to provide the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one
specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted
and received by DVI-compliant or HDMI-compliant displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or highdefinition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound
audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a
bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes per second (with HDTV signals),
one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and
communication between the AV source and AV devices such as
DTVs.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.
Connections
Connecting to a display (Using the HDMI cable)
The content of the output for each output jack are as shown in the following table and differ depending on User settings/operation.
Signal flow
Mode
VCR/DVD
USER setting/operation
HDMI
Output
*1
Off
VCR
To wall outlet
DVD
For proper operation, it is recommended
that you use as short an HDMI cable as
possible.
To HDMI OUT
Off
480p
720p
1080i
480p
720p
1080i
HDMI
Interlace
Progressive
-
Interlace
Progressive
Interlace
Progressive
Interlace
Progressive
480p (DVD)
720p (DVD)
1080i (DVD)
480p (DVD)
720p (DVD)
1080i (DVD)
-
Video
S-Video
Component
DVD
-
480i (DVD)
480p (DVD)
-
-
-
-
DVD
DVD
DVD
-
480i (DVD)
480p (DVD)
-
-
-
-
-
-
VCR
480p (DVD)
720p (DVD)
1080i (DVD)
480p (DVD)
720p (DVD)
1080i (DVD)
RF
Modulator
VCR
DVD
-
*1: Settings for HDMI output format are performed using the “HDMI” key on the remote control.
HDMI Cable (not supplied)
Switching the video quality (HDMI mode) using HDMI
button on the remote control
Press HDMI on the remote control to receive a suitable
video quality. The video quality is required to match
your TV having HDMI feature and suitable quality.
Please also check your TV owner's manual.
Press HDMI to change the video quality as follows:
HDMI: Off
3 Picture Output
• DVD Mode
The following refers to instructions for Picture Output in DVD Mode.
There is no Analog Output (*2) for HDMI output.
When HDMI output setting is “Off”, there is no HDMI output.
*2: Output from Video out jack/S-Video out jack/Component out jacks
To HDMI input
HDMI-compatible display
• Make sure following setting.
On-screen display
Select:
Page
“Digital Out”
“PCM”
$%
HDMI: cannot output
Component/Composite/S-Video: outputting
(Output setup is set to Progressive : cannot output S-Video)
NTSC: 480p (Progressive)
NTSC: 720p (Progressive)
HDMI: outputting
Component/Composite/S-Video: cannot output
NTSC: 1080i (Interlace)
Notes:
It is only possible to switch the HDMI output in the following below cases unless only an Audio/Video Cable/S-video cable/
Component Video Cables is connected.
* When in DVD Mode (in DISC/USB Mode)
* When the disc is in Stop or Resume mode
* When the Setup Menu is not being displayed
* When the HDMI Cable is connected
22
480p
720p
1080i
480p
720p
1080i
Content of output for each output jack
Output
Setting
• VCR Mode
The following refers to instructions for Picture Output in VCR mode.
This set outputs the picture from the Video out jack in VCR mode. However, please see the following instructions for HDMI out
jack/S-Video out jack/Component out jacks.
<During HDMI Output>
DVD picture is always output from HDMI out jack during HDMI Output, but it cannot output from S-Video out jack/Component out
jacks during HDMI Output.
<When HDMI Output setting is “Off”>
When the HDMI output setting is “Off”, this set outputs picture signals as follows according to the HDMI Setting in the Setup
Menu. When HDMI Output setting is “Off”, HDMI output does not function.
When the Output setting is “Interlace”: Picture from VCR is output from the Video out jack
Picture from the DVD is output from the S-Video out jack/Component out jacks
When Output setting is “Progressive”:
Picture from VCR is output from the Video out jack
NO OUTPUT from the S-Video out jack
Picture from the DVD is output from the Component out jacks
Notes:
• When in DVD Mode/outputting HDMI signal, it is impossible to output any video images from either the Video out jack/S-Video
out jack/Component out jacks.
If the viewer would like to view videos using the Video out jack/S-Video out jack/Component out jacks, then the HDMI output must
set to “Off” by pressing the HDMI button on the remote control.
• When the HDMI Cable is connected, if the HDMI is pressed or the VCR Mode is switched to DVD Mode, there is a possibility that
the monitor will not show any output images. In this case, turn off the HDMI mode.
Deactivate HDMI output with HDMI (For details, please refer to “Switching the video quality (HDMI mode) using HDMI
button on the remote control”
).
• Refer to the Owner’s manual of the connected TV as well.
• When connecting the DVD/VCR to your TV, be sure to turn off the power and unplug both units from the wall outlet before making any
connections.
• If you have an HDMI (with HDCP) equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to the DVD/VCR using the HDMI cable.
• The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the DVD/VCR is compatible
with, including DVD-Video, Video CD, Audio CD and MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files.
• No sound will be output from the HDMI cable if the “Digital Out” is not set to “PCM” $% .
23
Connections
Connecting to an audio equipment
You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds of DVD video discs or
audio CDs by connecting the DVD/VCR to optional audio
equipment.
For connection to your TV, see “Connecting to a TV”
.
• This selection uses the following reference mark.
: Front speaker
: Rear speaker
: Sub woofer
: Center speaker
: Signal flow
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby® Digital decoder
Amplifier equipped with a
Dolby Digital decoder
To COAXIAL
type digital
audio input
To OPTICAL
type digital
audio input
“Digital Out”
Select:
• Use DVD video discs
encoded via the MPEG2
recording system.
• Make sure following setting.
Amplifier equipped with an
MPEG2 audio decoder
To COAXIAL
type digital
audio input
Page
“PCM” or
$%
“Bitstream”
To OPTICAL
type digital
audio input Optical cable (not supplied)
75 1 coaxial cable (not supplied)
Select:
On-screen display
“Digital Out”
Page
“PCM” or $%
“Bitstream”
Connect either
Connect either
75 1 coaxial cable (not supplied)
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with Dolby Surround Pro Logic
Dolby Surround Pro Logic
You can enjoy the dynamic realistic sound of Dolby Surround Pro Logic by connecting an amplifier and speaker system (right and left
front speakers, a center speaker, and one or two rear speakers).
With an amplifier equipped with Dolby Digital
Connect the equipment the same way as described in “Connecting to an amplifier
equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder.” Refer to that amplifier’s owner’s manual and set
the amplifier so that you can enjoy Dolby Surround Pro Logic sound.
2 channel digital stereo
You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input and speaker
system (right and left front speakers).
• Make sure following setting.
On-screen display
Amplifier equipped with a
digital audio input
• Make sure following setting.
On-screen display
With an amplifier not equipped with Dolby Digital
Connect the equipment as follows.
• This connection is only suitable for Video CDs and
Audio CDs.
*
MPEG2 sound
You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic realistic sound
by connecting an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.
• Use DVD video discs
encoded via the Dolby Digital
recording system.
• Make sure following setting.
On-screen display
Optical cable (not supplied)
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Connections
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is
now available to reproduce this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live
concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system with this dynamic realistic
sound by connecting the DVD/VCR to a 6 channel amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder
or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you will obtain the full
benefit of Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks,
as well as from titles with the Dolby Surround mark.
Warning
When playing DTS-encoded discs (DVD video discs and audio CDs), excessive noise may be output from the analog stereo
jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, you should take proper precautions when the ANALOG AUDIO OUT (L/
R) jacks of the DVD/VCR are connected to an amplification system. (Do not leave the ANALOG AUDIO OUT (L/R) wires
dangling.) To enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 5.1 channel DTS Digital Surround™ decoder system must
be connected to the OPTICAL or COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR.
“Digital Out”
Select:
Page
To COAXIAL
type digital
audio input
“PCM” or $%
“Bitstream”
To OPTICAL
type digital
audio input Optical cable (not supplied)
Select:
Page
“PCM” or
$%
“Bitstream”
Connect either
75 1 coaxial cable (not supplied)
* Connect one or two rear speakers.
The output sound from the rear
speakers will be monaural even if you
connect two rear speakers.
Amplifier equipped with
Dolby Surround Pro Logic
“Digital Out”
To audio input
To ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
Audio cable (not supplied)
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a DTS decoder
Digital Theater Systems (DTS)
DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use,
on DVD video discs or audio CDs.
If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full
benefit of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD
video discs or audio CDs.
Amplifier equipped with a
DTS decoder
To COAXIAL
type digital
audio input
To OPTICAL
type digital
audio input
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,
Inc.
• Use DVD video discs or
audio CDs encoded via the
DTS recording system.
• Make sure following setting.
On-screen display
“Digital Out”
Optical cable (not supplied)
Select:
Page
“Bitstream” $%
Connect either
Notes:
• DO NOT connect the OPTICAL or COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby
Digital Receiver. This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the OPTICAL or
COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR.
• Connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the “OPTICAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.
• Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.
• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• When you connect the DVD/VCR to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the
wall outlet before making any connections.
• The output sound of the DVD/VCR has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate
listening level. Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.
• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the DVD/VCR’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier’s power on, the
speakers may be damaged.
75 1 coaxial cable (not supplied)
24
25
Connections
Basic setup (VCR)
Connecting to a USB Mass Storage
Setting the video channel
When a TV is connected with the 75 ohm coaxial cable only.
To view playback of a recorded tape or DVD disc, or to watch a
program selected by the VCR's channel selector, the TV must be set to
channel 3 or 4 (video channel).
This unit can be used to read JPEG, WMA, MP3 and DivX® data for any memory card reader/writer or digital camera that
accepts USB Mass Storage Class.
For devices that are compatible with the unit’s USB port, please refer to page 8 .
POWER
DVD/VCR
3
4
TV/VCR
DVD/VCR SELECT
Connecting to a USB Mass Storage
Setting the video channel
1
Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
2
Press and hold 3 or 4 on the remote for 3
seconds in standby mode.
OR
The video channel will
start to flash for 3
seconds in the display
window.
For a push-button TV tuner
Basic setup (VCR)
Signal flow
If CH 3 or 4 corresponding to the video channel cannot
be tuned on your TV, proceed as follows: set the VCR
3/4 channel selector and the TV to CH 3 or 4, playback
a prerecorded tape and tune the TV to receive a sharp
color picture from the video cassette recorder. Refer to
your TV owner's manual for details.
Note:
If the unit does not operate properly, or No key operation
(by the unit and/or the remote control): Static electricity, etc.,
may affect the player's operation. Disconnect the AC power cord
once, then connect it again.
To USB port
USB Mass Storage
3
Press POWER on the remote control or
ON/
STANDBY on the unit to turn on the DVD/VCR.
4
Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
5
Turn ON the TV and set to CH 3 or 4 to correspond with the channel selected in step 2.
6
Press TV/VCR to select the VCR position.
7
Select any channel to receive a TV station in
your area.
The channel number will appear on the screen
for about 4 seconds.
USB Cable (not supplied)
Notes:
In order to avoid damage to the unit, the USB Mass Storage, the Memory Card, etc, the following instructions should
be observed.
• Insert the USB cable properly taking care to observe the correct port direction.
• Make sure the unit is off or is set to DISC mode #& when disconnecting the USB Mass Storage from the unit.
• In order to avoid damage to recorded data, do not plug in or unplug the unit, no matter whether the USB Mass
Storage is On or Off, including Resume Stop mode.
• In order to avoid damage to recorded data, do not disconnect the USB Mass Storage from the port, no matter
whether the USB Mass Storage is On or Off, including Resume Stop mode.
• Before removing the Memory Card while a Memory Card Reader or Digital Camera is connected to the unit, ensure
that the power is off or that the unit is in DISC mode #& .
• Do not remove the Memory Card from the Memory Card Reader or Digital Camera no matter whether the Memory
Card is On or Off, including Resume Stop mode.
• In order to avoid damage to recorded data, do not plug in or unplug the unit, no matter whether the Memory Card
is inserted or not inserted into the Memory Card Reader or Digital Camera, including Resume Stop mode.
• In order to understand the correct operation and handling of the USB Mass Storage, read the USB Mass Storage
instructions carefully.
• As it cannot be guaranteed that recorded data will not be damaged while using this unit, it is recommended to
make back-up data.
• Avoid connecting any other USB connectable device that uses electricity from the USB connector such as a Printer
or Keyboard when the USB Mass Storage is connected.
• It is impossible to connect several devices by using a USB HUB.
26
The VCR indicator on the
front panel will light.
The VCR indicator will
appear in the display
window.
27
Basic setup (VCR)
DVD/VCR
Setting the language
You can choose from three different languages (English,
French and Spanish) for the on-screen display.
ENTER
SET +/–
POWER
DVD/VCR
Clock setting
The AUTO CLOCK function will automatically set the built-in clock
(Month, Day, Year and Time) when the DVD/VCR is connected to an
Antenna or Cable system and it is turned off. The DVD/VCR searches for
a station in your area containing the necessary AUTO CLOCK setting
signals. Once received, it will take approximately 4 minutes for the clock
to set itself automatically.
CALL
ENTER
SET +/–
VCR MENU
DVD/VCR SELECT
Setting the language
AUTO CLOCK setting
• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding
video input.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
4
Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is
cleared.
Press VCR MENU.
The VCR menu screen will appear.
Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM
SETUP”, then press ENTER.
If you use the unit for the first time,
press VCR MENU, instead of the
“SYSTEM SETUP” menu screen of
the main screen in step 2 may appear.
Notes:
• Both the VCR and the DVD have their own player menus 63 .
• If no buttons are pressed for more than 60 seconds, the VCR
MENU screen will return to normal TV-operation automatically.
To set AUTO CLOCK to off
When shipped from factory the AUTO CLOCK is set to “ON”.
But if you do not want AUTO CLOCK setting:
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
1
2
3
Connect the Antenna or Cable system.
4
Wait at least three minutes and press POWER.
5
Press CALL to check the clock setting on
the on screen display.
Make sure the DVD/VCR is turned off.
3
Press SET + or – to select the desired language:
English (ENGLISH), Spanish (ESPAÑOL) or
French (FRANCAIS), then press ENTER.
The auto clock adjustment will be updated at 6:00
AM, 12:00 PM and 6:00 PM everyday when the DVD/
VCR turned off.
• If you use a cable box and you want AUTO CLOCK
adjustment to be performed, the cable box must be
left on.
• The AUTO CLOCK adjustment is not effective when
there is a difference of more than 5 minutes exists
between the built-in clock time and the actual time.
〈 〉
3
Press SET + or – to select “AUTO CLOCK”.
4
Press ENTER to select “OFF”.
5
Press VCR MENU repeatedly to return to the
normal screen.
If the clock is not set, check the antenna
condition. The AUTO CLOCK may not
function properly if the reception condition
is not good.
AUTO CLOCK adjustment
Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”,
then press ENTER.
CH 125
00 : 00 : 00 SP
6
2
• Depending on the reception
condition it may take approx. thirty
minutes.
• If you press POWER, the Auto
Clock set is not programmed.
8 : 47AM MON
STEREO SAP
〈 〉
• If you use a cable box, turn it on.
〉
2
Press VCR MENU.
Plug the AC power cord to the AC outlet.
〈
Press SET + or – to select “LANGUAGE”, then
press ENTER.
1
Basic setup (VCR)
Preparation:
1
VCR MENU
DVD/VCR SELECT
• When the AUTO CLOCK is set to
“OFF”, the AUTO CLOCK adjustment
does not function. Set the clock
manually ! .
28
29
Basic setup (VCR)
Clock setting (Continued)
To set STANDARD TIME
In the rare event that you live within broadcast range of two You can set the DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME automatically or
stations in two different time zones, the DVD/VCR may recognize manually.
the wrong station for the AUTO CLOCK setting.
To correct the situation:
1
Press VCR MENU.
1
Press VCR MENU.
Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”,
then press ENTER.
ENTER
CANCEL
If the AUTO CLOCK process did not set the date and time correctly, you
must set them manually for timer recording and DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME.
Manual clock setting
EXAMPLE: Setting the clock to “8:30 AM” October, 28
(SAT), 2006.
2
Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”,
then press ENTER.
3
2
Press SET + or – to select “DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME”, then press ENTER.
Press SET + or – to select “STANDARD TIME”,
then press ENTER.
〈 〉
4
Press SET + or – to select your time zone,
then press ENTER.
3
OFF:
ATLANTIC : GMT–4hours
EASTERN : GMT–5hours
CENTRAL : GMT–6hours
MOUNTAIN : GMT–7hours
PACIFIC
: GMT–8hours
ALASKA
: GMT–9hours
HAWAII
: GMT–10hours
AUTO
: AUTO SET
(GMT: Greenwich Mean Time)
5
Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is
cleared.
AUTO:
for manual setting
(forward one hour)
for manual setting
(back one hour)
for automatic setting
(read XDS in the signal)
Press VCR MENU.
2
Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”,
then press ENTER.
3
6
After setting the clock, date and time starts
functioning automatically.
8 : 30AM SAT
To make corrections any time during the process
Press CANCEL repeatedly until the item you want to
change blinks, then press SET + or –.
Note:
After a power failure or disconnection of the power, the timer
settings will be lost. In this case, reset the present time.
Press SET + or – to select “CLOCK SET”,
then press ENTER.
〈 〉
4
When you want to set the DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME manually, on the first
Sunday in April you set to “ON”, and
on the last Sunday in October you set
to “OFF”.
Press SET + or – to set the month, then press
ENTER.
MONTH
DAY
10
1 (SUN)
YEAR
2006
TIME
12 : 00AM
〈+/–/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU 〉
〈 〉
Notes:
Notes:
• When shipped from factory, the DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME is
• To be able to select the standard time, the clock must first be
set to “AUTO” position.
set by AUTO CLOCK once.
• When the clock is not set, DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME setting
• If you live in Newfoundland and the AUTO CLOCK does not
is not available.
function properly, set the AUTO CLOCK menu option to “OFF”
• When there is no DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME in your area, aland set the clock manually.
ways select “OFF” position in step 3.
30
1
Press SET + or – to select one of the
options, then press ENTER. Press VCR
MENU until the MENU screen is cleared.
ON:
VCR MENU
Basic setup (VCR)
SET +/–
To set DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
5
Set the day, year and time as in step 4.
〈
〉
31
Basic setup (VCR)
DVD/VCR
Tuner setting
0–9
This DVD/VCR is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows
channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory,
skipping over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must
be programmed into the DVD/VCR’s memory. In addition to normal
VHF and UHF channels, this DVD/VCR can receive up to 113 Cable
TV channels. To use this DVD/VCR with an antenna, set the TV/CABLE
menu option to the TV mode. When shipped from the factory, this menu
option is in the CABLE mode.
TV/CABLE selection
Repeat left step 1 and press SET + or – to
select “AUTO CH MEMORY”.
VCR MENU
To ADD/DELETE channels
1
CH SETUP
Repeat the step 1 on page ! . Then press SET +
or – to select the “ADD/DELETE” and press
ENTER.
CH SETUP
TV CABLE
AUTO CH MEMORY
ADD/DELETE
Repeat the steps 1~2 on page ! and press
SET + or – to select “NO NOISE BACKGROUND”.
〈 〉
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
Press ENTER.
Auto tuning will begin. The channel display will count up and when finished,
the screen returns to normal.
1
TV CABLE
AUTO CH MEMORY
ADD/DELETE
〈+/-/ENTER/MENU 〉
2
Noise elimination
When you don't want to receive a weak signal broadcast, a Blue
back screen can be obtained by selecting the NO NOISE BACKGROUND to “ON”. When the unit is shipped from the factory,
the NO NOISE BACKGROUND is set to “ON”.
2
To Add or Delete channels
1) Press Direct channel selection buttons (0–9)
or SET +/– to select a channel number you want
to add or delete.
2) To add channels
Press ENTER until “ADD” appears on the screen.
To delete channels
Press ENTER until “DELETE” appears on the
screen. The channel number will blink.
+0 Press SET + or – to select “TV/CABLE”.
2
Press ENTER to select “ON” or “OFF” position.
3
Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is
cleared.
〈 〉
3) Repeat step 1 and 2 to add or delete other
channel.
CH SETUP
TV CABLE
AUTO CH MEMORY
ADD/DELETE
Basic setup (VCR)
1
Press VCR MENU. Press SET + or – to select
“CH SETUP”, then press ENTER.
2
ENTER
SET +/–
VCR MENU
DVD/VCR SELECT
Setting channels automatically
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding
video input.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
1
ENTER
SET +/–
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
3
Press ENTER to select the TV or CABLE
mode.
3
The arrow indicates the selected mode.
Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is
cleared.
CH SETUP
TV CABLE
AUTO CH MEMORY
ADD/DELETE
TV
- VHF/UHF channels
CABLE - Cable TV channels
4
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is
cleared.
Note:
You can’t select “CH SETUP” if you set the channel to “L1” or
“L2”.
32
33
Playback (VCR)
Loading and unloading a cassette tape
Use only video cassette tapes marked
DVD/VCR
Cassette tape playback
.
To play a prerecorded tape.
EJECT
STOP
PLAY
FWD
REV
DVD/VCR SELECT
Loading
Push the center of the tape until it is automatically
inserted.
Insert the cassette tape with its labeled side facing up
and the erase prevention tab positioned at your left. An
inverted cassette tape cannot be inserted.
Playback
Rewind or forward the tape
Preparation:
Erase prevention tab
Automatic power ON
When you insert a cassette tape, the DVD/VCR power will turn ON automatically.
1
Automatic playback
When loading a cassette tape without an erase prevention tab, playback will start automatically.
Unloading
1
Press EJECT on the front panel or on the remote.
2
Press REV.
Load a prerecorded tape
(When loading a cassette tape without the erase
prevention tab, playback will start automatically).
To forward the tape:
Remove the cassette tape.
Press FWD.
or
2
To start playback
Press PLAY.
Playback will start. “ ” will appear
on the screen for about 4 seconds.
Automatic tape eject
This DVD/VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended. Once the tape is rewound to its beginning,
the cassette tape will be ejected automatically.
To discontinue the tape-winding, press STOP. To switch to
playback directly (without STOP), press PLAY.
To prevent accidental erasure
To prevent accidental erasure
Remove the erase prevention tab with a screwdriver.
Stop the playback or recording via STOP on remote
control.
To rewind the tape:
Playback (VCR)
• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light).
To record again
To stop playback
Cover the hole with a piece of adhesive tape.
Press STOP once.
The tape will stop but remain fully
loaded and ready to play.
“ ” will appear on the screen for
about 4 seconds.
Screwdriver
Erase prevention tab
Forward/Reverse picture search mode
When the tape is being winded, you can switch to picture
search mode (see page 36 ). To do this, press REV or
FWD and hold it down. The unit will resume the tape
advance or rewinding as soon as the button is released.
Adhesive tape
Tape speed and maximum recording time
Tape Speed
Video cassette tape
T-160
T-120
T-90
T-60
T-30
SP (Standard Play)
2-2/3 hours
2 hours
1-1/2 hours
1 hour
30 minutes
SLP (Super Long Play)
8 hours
6 hours
4-1/2 hours
3 hours
1-1/2 hours
34
Notes:
• This VCR selects the playback tape speed SP, LP or SLP automatically.
• The Cassette tape and DVD disc can be played back simultaneously. If you press DVD/VCR SELECT, the tape playback
and DVD playback alternate with each other on the screen
(via CH3, 4 or video connection).
35
Playback (VCR)
Special playback
Convenience function
CALL
ZERO RETURN
CM SKIP
SET +/–
SET +/–
ENTER
STOP
PLAY
CLOCK/COUNTER
VCR MENU
COUNTER RESET
PLAY
PAUSE/STILL
FWD
SLOW
REV
ATR
Picture search
Adjusting tracking condition
PICTURE SEARCH SPEED
PRESS ONCE
PRESS TWICE
SP (Standard Play)
3X
LP (Long Play)
7X
9X
SLP (Super Long Play)
9X
15 X
Manual tracking adjustment
If automatic tracking cannot eliminate noises well during
playback, press SET +/– to eliminate the noise. “MANUAL
TR.” will appear on the screen. Press it once for a fine
adjustment, or press and hold for a coarse adjustment.
1
Press VCR MENU.
Press SET + or – to select “AUTO
REPEAT”.
Press ATR to reactivate automatic tracking again.
“AUTO TR.” will appear on the screen.
Slow motion
Slow tracking and vertical lock adjustment
If noise bars appear in the picture during slow motion,
press the SET + /– to reduce the noise bars.
If the still picture jitters excessively, press SET +/– to
stabilize the still picture.
2
Press ENTER to select “ON” or “OFF”.
If “ON” is selected, the playback will
be repeated endlessly.
Press CLOCK/COUNTER.
2
Press COUNTER RESET at the desired tape
position.
3
Press STOP when playback or recording is
completed.
Press ZERO RETURN.
The counter display shows the tape running time during playback or recording.
3
Video head cleaning
The counter display will be reset to
“00:00” position (e.g. the beginning of
recording).
Notes:
• The audio output is muted during PICTURE SEARCH, STILL,
FRAME ADVANCE and SLOW MOTION.
• During picture search mode there will be noise bars. This is
not a defect.
• Playback will commence after approx. 5 minutes to protect
the video tape against excessive wear during pause mode.
Video head clogging
The video heads are the means by
which the DVD/VCR reads the picture
from the tape during playback. In the
unlikely event that the heads become
Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.
Press SLOW repeatedly. The picture advances frame by dirty enough to be clogged, no picture
will be displayed. This can easily be
frame.
determined if, during playback of a
To return to playback, press PLAY or PAUSE/STILL.
known good tape, there is good sound,
but no picture (picture is extremely
snowy). If this is the case, the DVD/
VCR need to check and clean by the
qualified service personnel.
1
Still picture
During playback press SLOW.
To return to playback, press PLAY.
This function rewinds the tape to the “00:00” counter position
automatically.
5X
Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.
To resume normal playback, press PLAY or PAUSE/STILL.
Zero return function
The entire video tape will play until its end. The tape will
automatically rewind to the beginning and the playback will be
repeated.
Playback (VCR)
SPEED SEARCH TIMES
TAPE SPEED
Repeat playback
Automatic tracking adjustment
Whenever you insert a tape and start playback, the
automatic tracking feature continuously analyzes the signal
to enable optimum picture quality during playback.
Reverse picture search function
Press REV once or twice during playback.
Forward picture search function
Press FWD once or twice during playback.
To return to playback, press PLAY.
Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is
cleared.
If you press CALL, “
on the screen 11 .
” will appear
The tape will automatically rewind or fast
forward to the “00:00” counter position.
Frame by frame picture
Good Picture
4
To commence playback, press PLAY.
The playback will be repeated
endlessly.
CM skip
Press CM SKIP during playback. The DVD/VCR will search
Snowy Picture
forward through approximately 30 seconds of the tape (e.g. Notes:
unwanted commercial time) for each press of CM SKIP (maxi- • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE VIDEO HEADS OR
mum six presses) and then resume normal playback.
SERVICE THE UNIT BY REMOVING THE REAR COVER.
For example
: 1 press: 30 seconds of tape
2 press: 60 seconds of tape
3 press: 90 seconds of tape
To cancel repeat mode:
Follow the above step 1, then press ENTER to select “OFF”
position. Press VCR MENU to return to the TV.
• Video heads may eventually wear out and should be replaced when they fail to produce clear pictures.
• To help prevent video head clogging, use only good quality VHS tapes. Discard worn out tapes.
36
37
Recording (VCR)
Playback (VCR)
Convenience function (Continued)
DVD/VCR
0–9
Recording a TV program
Recording and viewing the same TV program.
CH +/–
STOP
VISS +/–
CLOCK/COUNTER
DVD/VCR SELECT
Clock/counter display
Press CLOCK/COUNTER. The clock and tape counter
alternate with each other in the display window.
COUNTER
Press DVD/VCR SELECT. The DVD mode and the
VCR mode alternate with each other in the display.
DVD mode
Recording a TV program
This function enables you to locate the beginning of any recording
made on the VCR.
Recording an INDEX mark
The Index Search function automatically records an INDEX mark
on the tape whenever a recording
is initiated.
CH 001
INDEX
Index search
Press VISS + or – during stop or play mode.
For Succeeding programs: Press VISS +.
For Preceding programs: Press VISS –.
(As many as 9 index points can be accessed via this
method.)
When the VISS + or – is pressed,
the unit starts searching the selected INDEX NO. and finds the
portion. Then playback starts automatically. To stop the Index
Search, press STOP.
or
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding
video input.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
1
Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention
tab intact.
The DVD/VCR will automatically turn on.
Press Number buttons or CH +/– to select the
channel to be recorded.
+0 TV mode direct channel selection:
All channels can be instantly selected by using two
buttons. (for example, to select channel 2, press “0”, then
“2”. If you press only “2”, channel selection will be delayed
for two seconds.) For channels 10 and above, press the 2
digits in order.
CABLE mode direct channel selection:
1-9
Press 0 twice and then 1-9 as required.
Example: To select “2”, Press 002.
Press 0 first and then the remaining 2 digits in
order from left to right.
Example: Press 012 for “12”.
13-99
Press 2 digits in order.
Example: Press 22 for “22”.
100-125 Press the 3 digits in order.
Example: Press 110 for “110”.
10-12
2
is displayed
INDEX NO. (up to 9)
Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed
SP or SLP.
The tape counter and “SP” or “SLP”
will appear on the screen for about 4
seconds.
VCR mode
Notes:
• If you rewind the tape beyond “00:00”, a minus sign (“–”) will
be displayed in front of the time.
• When you load a tape, the counter will reset to “00:00”.
• The counter does not function on non-recorded (blank)
sections of the tape. When you rewind, fast forward or play
tapes through blank sections, the counter stops.
4
Recording (VCR)
CLOCK
Video index search system
SP/SLP
DVD/VCR SELECT
REC/OTR
VHF/UHF/CABLE TV CHANNELS
Notes:
• When you record an INDEX mark at the very beginning of the
tape, the mark may not be found.
• During INDEX search, the tape may stop and begin to play at a
slightly different location.
• INDEX may not function properly with old or worn out video
tapes.
• INDEX marks may not be found if it is extremely close to the point
where the search began.
• During recording, if you stop recording temporarily, the INDEX
mark is not recorded on the tape.
SQPB (S-VHS Quasi Playback)
You can playback video cassette tapes recorded in the
S-VHS system.
However, the picture will not have the high resolution of
S-VHS system.
TV
VHF
2-13
UHF
14-69
00 : 00 : 00 SP
3
CABLE TV
VHF
2-13
STD/HRC/IRC
14-36 (A) (W)
37-59 (AA) (WW)
60-85 (AAA) (ZZZ)
86-94 (86) (94)
95-99 (A-5) (A-1)
100-125 (100) (125)
01 (5A)
Select “TV” or “CABLE” to the appropriate
position ! .
TV
- VHF/UHF channels
CABLE - Cable TV channels
5
Press REC/OTR.
“ ” will appear on the screen for
about 4 seconds and “REC” will
appear on the display window.
CH 110
Note: You cannot record S-VHS video format with this VCR.
INDEX
38
39
Recording (VCR)
Recording a TV program (Continued)
DVD/VCR
0–9
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)
The One-touch Timer Recording feature provides a simple and
convenient way to make a timed recording.
STOP
TV/VCR
SP/SLP
DVD/VCR SELECT
REC/OTR
To stop recording
Recording one program while watching another
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)
Press STOP to stop recording.
While the VCR is recording, select your desired channel
on the TV.
When a TV is connected with an antenna cable only,
press TV/VCR to select the TV position.
The “VCR” display will go off and recording will continue.
Select the TV channel you want to watch by using the
TV channel selector.
Preparation:
“ ” will appear on screen for about
4 seconds.
CH +/–
STOP
PAUSE/STILL
1
4
Press Direct channel selection buttons (0–9) or
CH +/– to select the channel to be recorded.
+0 Load a cassette tape with the erase
prevention tab intact.
The VCR will automatically turn on.
To stop recording temporarily
5
Press PAUSE/STILL to avoid recording unwanted
material. Press again to continue the recording.
Recording (VCR)
Note:
Some Cable TV hookups do not permit viewing one channel
while recording another. See pages & and ' .
• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding
video input.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
Example: One-touch Timer Recording for 30 minutes.
Press REC/OTR. Recording begins. Press the
button again to stop recording after 30 minutes.
Each additional press of REC/OTR will increase
recording time as shown in the chart below, up
to a maximum of 6 hours.
The OTR and recording time will
appear on the screen for about 4
seconds. And, “ ” will appear on
the display.
“
” will appear on screen for
about 4 seconds.
2
Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed
SP or SLP.
Press Recording time
NORMAL REC
once
0:30
twice
1:00
3 times
1:30
4 times
2:00
5 times
The tape counter and “SP” or “SLP”
will appear on the screen for about 4
seconds.
Notes:
• The pause function will be released after 5 minutes to prevent
damage to the tape or the VCR. The VCR will change to the
STOP mode.
• You can select a recording channel in the recording pause
mode.
Press Recording time
3:00
6 times
4:00
7 times
5:00
8 times
6:00
9 times
10 times NORMAL REC
OTR 0 : 30
CH 110
00 : 00 : 00 SP
INDEX
Auto Rewind feature
This VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape
has ended (except during OTR and timer recording). It will
also eject the tape.
3
Set “TV” or “CABLE” option to the appropriate
position ! .
To cancel OTR
Press STOP or turn off the power.
TV
- VHF/UHF channels
CABLE- Cable TV channels
“
” will appear on screen for about 4 seconds.
Note:
If you wish to watch the DVD playback during OTR or standard
recording, press DVD/VCR SELECT to change to DVD mode
and perform the DVD playback 47 .
40
41
Recording (VCR)
DVD/VCR
Timer recording
Timer recording can be programmed on-screen with the remote control.
The built-in timer allows automatic unattended recording of up to 8
programs within 1 month.
SET +/–
SET +/–
ENTER
CANCEL
ENTER
CANCEL
VCR MENU
EJECT
DVD/VCR SELECT
TIMER REC
proceduretimer
ToSetting
set daily/weekly
Timer recording
Preparation:
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab
intact.
• Check the time and date are correct ' .
Example: Program a timer recording for the 26th day,
channel 125 (Cable TV), 11:00 - 11:30 PM on timer
program number 1 (Tape speed: SLP).
5
6
〈
〉
3
Set the start time, end time, channel and tape
speed as in step 3.
〈
〉
Notes:
• Press CANCEL to move cursor backward for correction.
• To record from external source set the channel to “L1” or
“L2”.
42
At the same time, VCR mode will
change to DVD mode automatically.
You can use DVD even if the VCR is
in the timer recording mode.
If you do not use the DVD, turn the
power off.
Notes:
• The timer recording will start at 5 seconds before the
preset starting time.
• If the timer symbol (
) does not appear on the display
when TIMER REC is pressed, the cassette is not inserted
34
Press SET + or – to select the date, then press
ENTER.
〈
〉
4
Press TIMER REC. The timer symbol ( ) will
appear on the display and the VCR standbys
for recording.
Press SET + or – to select one of the program
line, then press ENTER.
〈
〉
2
The current day (Friday)
Notes:
• If the timer symbol ( ) blinks when the timer recording ended,
the TV program has not been completely recorded because of
an insufficient tape length. Press TIMER REC to cancel the
timer program or press EJECT to remove the cassette tape.
• During timer recording standby mode, the VCR mode cannot be
operated. To use the VCR, first press TIMER REC then press
DVD/VCR SELECT to change to VCR mode. After VCR mode
is selected, press TIMER REC again to put the VCR into timer
recording standby mode.
• If you press TIMER REC during timer recording, the recording
operation will be interrupted. If you press TIMER REC again
within the programmed time, the recording operation will start
again.
• After a power failure or disconnection of the power plug, all
programmed recording settings and time display will be lost
upon resumption of power. In this case, reset the clock ' and
reprogram any timer recording.
If the Timer has been activated, press TIMER
REC to deactivate the Timer.
2
To confirm Timer program:
The timer symbol ( ) will
disappear. Then press DVD/VCR
SELECT to change to VCR mode.
SU-SA (Sunday to Saturday)
MO-SA (Monday to Saturday)
One month later
minus one day
MO-FR (Monday to Friday)
WKL-WE
(Weekly Wednesday)
WKL-TH (Weekly Thursday)
At step 1 on page 42 , select “TIMER REC SET”
and press ENTER.
The timer program list will appear on the screen.
〈
〉
Do not overlap timer programs as portions of the
conflicting programs will be lost. The first recording
time has priority over the next recording time as shown
in the diagram below.
8 : 00
9 : 00
10 : 00
DATE
START END
26(SA)
11:00PM 11:30PM 125 SLP
CH
〈+/—/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU〉
3
If the programs overlap another
.
• If the cassette is ejected when TIMER REC is pressed, the
erase prevention tab of the cassette may have been
removed 34 .
• During Timer recording, the power cannot be turned off.
1
When you press SET – repeatedly, the
DATE indicator will change as follows, in
this case the day is Friday.
Press VCR MENU. Select “TIMER REC SET”,
then press ENTER.
Follow the procedure of timer recording on page 42 . At
step 3, press SET + or – repeatedly until the desired setting
appears. Then press ENTER.
• To return to the normal screen,
press VCR MENU twice.
To confirm or cancel a program
Weekly (e.g. WKL-TU: each Tuesday) or daily (e.g. MOSA: Monday to Saturday) Timer recording
To enter other programs, repeat steps 2
through 4.
Recording (VCR)
1
VCR MENU
DVD/VCR SELECT
TIMER REC
To cancel Timer program:
Press SET + or – to select the unwanted program,
then press CANCEL to cancel the program.
11 : 00
Program 1
〈
〉
Program 2
Deleted Parts
Program 3
Non Recorded Portion Parts
Recording
Control Settings
Prog.1
Prog.2
Prog.3
4
Press VCR MENU repeatedly until the menu
screen is cleared.
Notes:
• The daily/weekly recording can be made continuously until the
recording is canceled or the tape reaches the end.
Notes:
• During timer recording the automatic rewinding mechanism
• If there are other timer record programs remaining, TIMER
does not function.
REC must be pressed to reactivate the timer, otherwise the
remaining timer record programs will be ignored.
• You cannot confirm the Timer program during timer recording
operation.
• You can correct or cancel a programmed setting in program
confirm mode.
43
Other functions (VCR)
Stereo recording and playback/
Second Audio Program (SAP)
DVD/VCR
Duplicating a video tape
If you connect the DVD/VCR to another VCR or Camcorder, you can duplicate
a previously recorded tape. Make all connections before turning on the power.
INPUT SELECT
ENTER
SET +/–
STOP
VCR MENU
AUDIO SELECT
Stereo recording and playback
The VHS Hi-Fi audio system permits high fidelity recording of MTS STEREO TV broadcasts.
When a MTS STEREO broadcast is received, “STEREO” will
appear on the screen for about
4 seconds and the program can
be viewed or recorded in stereo.
The Hi-Fi stereo recording procedure is the same as for normal
recordings.
STEREO
Second Audio Program (SAP)
Your DVD/VCR is fitted with a SAP broadcast system which
enables you to switch to a second audio program when viewing a selected channel.
This function applies only when the program is broadcast in
multi-languages through the SAP broadcast system.
1
Press VCR MENU. Then press SET + or – to
select “SAP”.
Output selection
When viewing an MTS stereo TV program, or playing a
prerecorded VHS Hi-Fi stereo videotape, press AUDIO
SELECT to select how the audio will be heard through
the speakers. Normally set to the Hi-Fi stereo position,
this button can be set to the MONO position if the
stereo broadcast or videotape audio is of poor quality.
The “R” and “L” positions allow the audio from the Right
or Left Hi-Fi channel to be heard over both TV speakers. This button has no effect when viewing a MONO
videotape or TV program. Each time when you press
the button, OUTPUT SELECTION display appears on
the screen for several seconds. Refer to the chart
below.
OUTPUT
SELECTION
SOUND HEARD ON BOTH
SPEAKERS
STEREO
L ch
R ch
MONO
STEREO
LEFT CHANNEL AUDIO
RIGHT CHANNEL AUDIO
MONO
2
Duplicating a video tape
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video
input.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab
intact.
• Load a previously recorded tape into the playback
VCR or Camcorder.
Connection with second VCR
Playback VCR
To VIDEO OUT
To AUDIO (R) OUT
To AUDIO (L) OUT
1
Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed
SP or SLP.
AUDIO/VIDEO cable (supplied)
It is recommended to set the tape
speed to the SP mode on the
recording VCR for best results.
Recording VCR
Other functions (VCR)
Note:
When using a Cable TV system, stereo TV programs may
be transmitted over a mono cable channel. In this case
“STEREO” will not appear and the sound will be in mono.
SP/SLP
DVD/VCR SELECT
REC/OTR
Press ENTER to select “ON”.
Then press VCR MENU until the
menu screen is cleared.
2
Press INPUT SELECT once or twice to select
AUDIO/VIDEO input position.
To AUDIO (R) IN
To VIDEO IN
“L1” or “L2” will appear in the display.
To AUDIO (L) IN
Connection with Camcorder
L1: on the rear panel
L2: on the front panel
Listening to SAP
When the VCR is turned on or a channel selection is
made, make certain the letters “SAP” appears on the
screen for about 4 seconds. This means that the “Second
Audio Program” broadcasting is available.
Playback Camcorder
3
Press PLAY on the playback VCR or Camcorder.
4
Press REC/OTR on the recording VCR.
To AV Jack
Recording VCR
The duplicating process begins.
5)2
OR
To AUDIO (R) IN
To AUDIO (L) IN
AUDIO/VIDEO cable (not supplied)
To VIDEO IN
Notes:
• When playing back a tape that is not recorded in Hi-Fi stereo
mode, the audio will automatically be monaural.
• When listening to a VHS Hi-Fi video tape or MTS broadcast
through the VHF/UHF jack (Audio/Video cable not connected),
the sound will be monaural.
5
Press STOP when you finish duplicating.
For duplicating a previously recorded tape from a
camcorder, follow the camcorder manufacturer’s
instructions. A typical camcorder dubbing hookup is
shown above.
44
45
Other functions (VCR)
Basic playback (DVD)
DVD/VCR
Recording a DVD/CD disc
You can record disc material in DVD, Video CD, Audio CD, etc.
onto a Video tape with this DVD/VCR.
This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.
ON/STANDBY
STOP
PLAY
SP/SLP
DVD/VCR SELECT
REC/OTR
• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video
input.
• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.
• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.
• Load a DVD/CD disc.
1
Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed
SP or SLP.
CAUTION
Keep your fingers well clear of the
disc tray as it is closing. Neglecting
to do so may cause serious
personal injury.
DVD
VCD
CD
Duplicating a DVD or CD disc
Preparation:
DVD/VCR
Playing a disc
Notes:
• You may not be able to record the beginning of the disc.
Begin VCR recording once program playback commences
on the DVD.
• When the scanning mode is set to the progressive mode,
you cannot duplicate a disc material onto a video tape.
When REC/OTR is pressed, the PROGRESSIVE indicator
“ ” on the display window will flash.
• When the HDMI mode is ON (480p, 720p, 1080i), you
cannot duplicate a disc material onto a video tape.
• You cannot record discs encoded with copy guard
function. The following icon and text will show up on the
TV screen.
VCR/DVD
STOP
Disc tray
C/D/B/A
ENTER
Display window
PLAY
OPEN/CLOSE
Basic playback
Preparations:
• When you want to view a disc, turn on the TV and select the corresponding video input connected to the DVD/VCR.
This may include S-video or component video inputs which are exclusive to DVD playback.
• When you want to enjoy the sound of discs from the audio system, turn on the audio system and select the input
connected to the DVD/VCR.
1
Press DVD/VCR on the remote control to
operate the DVD/VCR.
6
Press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY on the unit.
The disc tray closes automatically.
On the TV-screen, “ ” changes to
“Reading” and then playback
commences.
OR
2
Press
ON/STANDBY.
• A menu screen will appear on the TV screen, if
the disc has a menu feature.
The DVD/VCR turns on.
Reading
00 : 00 : 00 SP
Press DVD/VCR SELECT selector to select the
DVD mode.
3
Press PLAY to start playback.
4
5
46
3
Press VCR/DVD on the unit to select the DVD mode.
4
Press OPEN/CLOSE.
The DVD indicator will light.
The DVD indicator will light.
7
Press
8
Press ENTER.
9
Press STOP to end playback.
/
or
/
Basic playback (DVD)
2
DISC IS COPY PROTECTED
to select title.
The disc tray opens.
• Title is selected and play
commences.
Press REC/OTR to start recording.
The DVD/VCR will change to the
VCR mode automatically and the
playback picture or sound will be
duplicated on the video cassette
tape.
5
Place the disc on the disc tray.
With the playback
side down
Press STOP when you finish recording.
If you wish to stop a DVD/CD disc,
press DVD/VCR SELECT selector to
change the DVD mode, then press
STOP.
• There are two different disc sizes. Place the disc
in the correct guide on the disc tray. If the disc is
out of the guide, it may damage the disc and
cause the DVD/VCR to malfunction.
• Do not place a disc which is unplayable in this
DVD/VCR.
• The unit records the stopped point,
depending on the disc. “ ”
appears on the screen. Press
PLAY to resume playback (from
the scene point).
• If you press STOP again or unload
the disc (“ ” appears on the
screen.), the unit will clear the
stopped point.
To start playback in the stop mode
Press PLAY.
47
Basic playback (DVD)
To obtain a higher quality picture
Occasionally, some picture noise not usually visible on the TV screen during a normal
broadcast may appear while playing a DVD video disc.
It is because due to high resolution pictures on these discs which include a lot of
information. The amount of noise depends on the disc you use with this unit. You should
generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD video discs.
About DVD VCD CD 75*
The DVD VCD CD icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the
STOP
function described under that heading.
PLAY
DVD : You can use this function with DVD video discs.
PAUSE/STILL
VCD : You can use this function with Video CDs.
CD
DVD/VCR SELECT 75* : You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.
: You can use this function with USB Mass Storage.
OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
DVD
VCD
CD
Playing a disc (Continued)
You can play discs at various speeds.
PAUSE/STILL
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
REV
SKIP /
DVD
VCD
CD
Basic playback
Playing a Disc while the VCR section is recording
or standing by for timer recording
To pause playback (still mode)
Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.
To resume normal playback, press
PLAY.
• The sound is muted during still
mode.
To stop playback
Press STOP.
To remove the disc
Press OPEN/CLOSE.
Remove the disc after the disc tray
opens completely.
1) Start to record.
Follow steps 1~5 on page !' .
• If the DVD/VCR is standing by for recording, turn on
the DVD/VCR.
2) Press DVD/VCR SELECT selector to select DVD mode.
3) Play a disc.
Follow steps 4 ~ 6 on page 47 .
• Press PLAY if the DVD/VCR does not start to play a
disc automatically.
4) Stop to play.
Press STOP to stop play back a disc.
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
Press REV or FWD during playback.
FWD
REV: Fast reverse playback
FWD: Fast forward playback
Each time you press REV or FWD,
the playback speed changes.
DVD
VCD
Playing frame by frame
Press PAUSE/STILL during still playback.
Notes:
• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen
according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again % % .
• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.
• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (i.e. the wrong way up) and press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY on the unit,
“Reading” will appear on the display for a few minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.
• Some discs may not work the resuming facility.
• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see page 56 .
• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to
the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the
instructions supplied with the DVDs.
• Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.
• Use the OPEN/CLOSE to open and close the disc tray. Do not push the disc tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the
unit to malfunction.
• Do not push up on the disc tray or put any objects other than discs on the disc tray. Doing so may cause the unit to
malfunction.
• In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen
menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press
POWER on your remote control once the movie is completed.
• There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.
• The screen saver does not operate when connecting this DVD/VCR to the TV using the HDMI cable.
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
Each time you press PAUSE/STILL,
the picture advances one frame.
Note:
The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
DVD
VCD
Playing in slow-motion
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
Press SLOW during playback.
Be sure to press OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray
after you remove the disc.
Notes:
• The DVD/VCR mutes sound and subtitles during reverse
and forward scan of DVD/VCD video discs. However, this
unit plays sound during fast forward or fast reverse play of
audio CDs.
• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.
Basic playback (DVD)
Screen saver function
The screen saver operates when you leave the unit in
DVD stop mode for approx. five minutes.
The screen will repeatedly get dark gradually and back
to normal.
Please press any button when you want to return to an
usual screen.
To turn on or off the screen saver, see page $$ .
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions
Each time you press the button, the
slow-motion speed changes.
DVD
VCD
CD
Note:
The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.
Locating a chapter or track
Press SKIP
or
repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.
Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.
To locate succeeding chapters or
tracks.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
current chapter or track.
When you press twice in quick successions,
playback starts from the beginning of the
preceding chapter or track.
Notes:
• A prohibition symbol “ ” may appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not
available on the disc, or the DVD/VCR cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the DVD/
VCR.
• The unit is capable of holding a still video image or On screen display image on your television screen indefinitely. If you leave
the still video image or On screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time, you risk permanent
damage to your television screen. Projection televisions are very susceptible.
48
49
Advanced playback (DVD)
Zooming/Locating desired scene
Marking desired scenes
0–9
The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.
You can resume playback from each scene.
DISPLAY
C/D
JUMP
C/D/B/A
ENTER
CLEAR
ZOOM
DVD
VCD
CD
ENTER
CLEAR
MARKER
Zooming
DVD
VCD
This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.
1
Press ZOOM during playback.
The center part of the image will be
zoomed in.
Each press of ZOOM will change the
ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5) and 3
(x 2.0).
1
2
D/B
B/A
A to view a different part of the
Press C/D
frame.
1
In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to
return to a 1:1 view ( Off).
2
Press MARKER during playback.
Marker1
Marker2
Marker3
Select the blank Marker using C or D.
Then press ENTER at the desired scene.
Marker1
Marker2
Marker3
00 27 54
1
Jump
3
Title
Chapter
Time
2
Jump
Title
Chapter
Time
Press C or D to select the “Title/Track”, “Chapter”
or “Time”.
Title
Chapter
Time
Notes:
• In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time
can be selected.
• In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does
not work. Turn off the PBC 56 .
12
Marker1
Marker2
Marker3
3
00 27 54
01 16 25
02 08 31
Press ENTER.
Playback starts from the marked
scene.
To cancel the Marker
Follow the above steps 1~2, then press CLEAR.
Notes:
• Some discs may not work with the marking operation.
• The marking is canceled when you open the disc tray or
turn the power off.
• Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to
appear.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Marker function is prohibited.
• If you input a wrong number, press
CLEAR.
• Refer to the package supplied with
the disc to check the numbers.
Jump
50
Press Number buttons (0–9) to change the
number.
Press C or D to select the Marker 1-3.
Press MARKER to clear this display.
Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to play back. In the case of VCD/CD
discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to play back. To check the title, chapter and time, press DISPLAY.
Press JUMP during playback or resume stop
mode.
2
00 27 54
01 16 25
02 08 31
Advanced playback (DVD)
3
Locating desired scene
1
Returning to the scenes
Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.
• Repeat this procedure to set the
other 2 scenes.
Notes:
• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the zoom mode.
• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.
DVD
VCD
CD
DVD
VCD
Marker1
Marker2
Marker3
You may move the frame from the
center position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or
RIGHT direction.
3
Marking the scenes
4
Press ENTER. Playback starts.
• When you change the title,
playback starts from Chapter 1 of
the selected title.
• Some discs may not work in the
above operation.
51
Advanced playback (DVD)
Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback
Program playback/Random playback
0–9
You can arrange the playback order of tracks or files on the disc.
And the unit can also select tracks or files at random and playback
them. These feature works for Video CD.
ENTER
C/D/B/A
ENTER
CLEAR
PLAY
For Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD, please see “Random playback
(CD/USB)” $ and “Program playback (CD/USB)” 62 .
D
PLAY
PLAYMODE
PLAYMODE
A-B RPT
DVD
VCD
1
2
DVD
VCD
CD
Repeat playback
Press PLAYMODE during playback or stop mode.
A-B Repeat playback
VCD
A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat material between
two selected points.
1
Press A-B RPT during playback.
4
Press PLAYMODE during stop mode.
Play Mode
Mode
Repeat
The start point is selected.
: Off
1
———
: Off
2
———
3
———
Program Playback
[DVD]
Press ENTER to select “Chapter” or “Title”.
A to return to the left column, then
Press B/A
D to select the “Program Playback”
press C/D
and press ENTER.
The programs you selected will start to playback in
the order.
• To resume normal playback, select Mode
A
Play Mode
Repeat
1
Program playback
2
“Off” in step 2.
D to select “Mode”, then press
Press C/D
ENTER to select “Program”.
Play Mode
Mode
: Off
Repeat
Play Mode
The unit automatically starts repeat
playback after finishing the current title or chapter.
2
1
2
3
–––
Repeat
: Off
2
3
–––
–––
The end point is selected. Playback
starts at the point that you selected.
Playback stops at the end point, returns to Point A automatically, then
starts again.
3
A to select the right column, then use
Press B/A
Number buttons (0–9) to input the track numbers.
ÐÐÐ
ÐÐÐ
ÐÐÐ
• If you input a wrong number, press
CLEAR.
A B
Play Mode
Mode
Repeat
The unit automatically starts repeat
playback after finishing the current
track.
• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode,
press PLAY to start Repeat playback.
“
Press PLAYMODE again to clear the screen.
To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Notes:
• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, repeat functions are prohibited during playback.
• Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever
SKIP
or
is pressed.
1
9
: Off
2
–––
3
–––
To resume normal playback
Press A-B RPT again.
Off ” appears on the screen.
[Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD]
Please see “Repeat playback (CD/USB)” $ .
3
: Program
Program Playback
Notes:
• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations may
not be displayed.
• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include
multiple angles.
• A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is
activated.
• You may not be able to set A-B Repeat, during certain scenes
of the DVD.
• A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD, MP3/WMA/
JPEG/DivX® CD.
• A-B Repeat is prohibited when PBC is on.
VCD
1
2
: Program
1
: Off
2
3
3
11
Program Playback
9
■ To change the program
1. Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press B /A/C/
D to select the track number you want to change, then
press CLEAR.
2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to overwrite the new
track number.
■ To clear the program one by one
Select Mode to “Program”, press B/A/C/D to select the
track number. Then press CLEAR.
■ To clear all the programs
In the left column, press C/D to select “Clear Program”.
Then press ENTER.
Notes:
• In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set
Program playback.
• The program is canceled when you open the disc tray or
turn the power off.
Advanced playback (DVD)
: Off
: Off
1
Program Playback
Play Mode
Repeat
: Program
Press A-B RPT again.
[Video CD]
Press D to select “Repeat”.
Press ENTER to select “Track” or “All”.
Mode
Mode
Random playback
Press PLAYMODE during playback or stop mode.
3
D to select “Mode”, then press
Press C/D
ENTER to select “Random”.
: Random
Repeat
: Off
Program Playback
1
2
3
The Random Playback will start.
• If you set “Random” during playback mode,
Random playback will begin after the track that is
currently being played has ended.
• To resume normal playback, select Mode
“Off” in step 2.
Play Mode
Mode
Press PLAY.
–––
–––
–––
Note:
In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set
Random playback.
52
53
Advanced playback (DVD)
Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu
DVD MENU
C/D/B/A
ENTER
PLAY
TOP MENU
Changing soundtrack language/
Setting surround sound
B/A
ANGLE
DVD
Changing angles
When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.
1
AUDIO
DVD
VCD
Press ANGLE during playback.
The current angle will appear.
2
Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle
is selected.
Changing soundtrack language
You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.
1
Press AUDIO during playback.
The current soundtrack language will
appear.
In case of Video CD playback
Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO.
LR
L
R
1/2 Eng Dolby Digital
1/2
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the
angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.
DVD
2
Press AUDIO repeatedly until the desired language is selected.
2/2 Fre Dolby Digital
Title selection
Notes:
• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the
button several times, the language is not recorded on
the disc.
• Changing soundtrack language is canceled when you
open the disc tray. The initial default language or available
language will be heard if the disc is played back again.
Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.
• The on screen display will disappear after a few
2
D/B
B/A
A to select the desired title.
Press C/D
Title menu appears on the screen.
3
The playback of the selected title will
start.
Setting surround sound
1
During disc playback press AUDIO.
DVD menu
Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.
When you play back these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language and sound-track language, etc. using the menu.
1
Press DVD MENU during playback.
The DVD menu appears on the screen.
• Press DVD MENU again to resume
playback at the scene when you
press DVD MENU.
2
D/B
B/A
A to select the desired item.
Press C/D
54
DVD
This DVD video player equipped with a “QSound”. It can produce the effect of being in a cinema or a concert hall.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.
Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a
“menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.
DVD
seconds.
Press ENTER or PLAY.
3
Press ENTER.
The menu continues to another
screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set
the item completely.
2
Press B or A to select “On”.
To cancel Surround mode:
Follow the left steps 1~2, then press B or A to select the
“Off” position.
Notes:
• The QSound setting can also be changed in the function
setting $% .
• The “QSound” works only when the DVD disc recorded
with Dolby Digital is played back.
• When this function works, the volume might changed.
• When the voice is distorted, turn off QSound.
Advanced playback (DVD)
1
Press TOP MENU during playback.
• The on screen display will disappear after a few
seconds.
Manufactured under license from QSound Labs,
Inc. U.S. patent Nos. 5,105,462, 5,208,860 and
5,440,638 and various foreign counterpart.
Copyright QSound Labs, Inc. 1998-2002.
QXpander™ is a trademark of QSound Labs, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume playback
from the scene point when you press DVD MENU.
55
Advanced playback (DVD)
Subtitles/To turn off the PBC
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation
This player can playback the MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-data which has been recorded on CD-R/RW or USB Mass Storage. To
produce the MP3/WMA JPEG/DivX®-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive or USB memory device and a MP3/
WMA/JPEG/DivX®-encoding Software (not supplied). The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.
C/D
ENTER
This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.
There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA files). Not all
recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner's manual are meant
only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.
SUBTITLE
PLAYMODE
DVD
When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can
select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.
1
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® - data information
1
Press PLAYMODE in the stop mode.
2
Press / to select “Mode”, then press
ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appear.
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback
until your desired language appears.
1/5 Eng
Play Mode
2
You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content.
Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.
To turn off the PBC (see page 8)
Subtitles
Mode
To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until
“Off” appears.
Repeat
: Off
1
———
: Off
2
———
3
———
Program Playback
Off
• The on screen display will disappear after a few
seconds.
Press PLAYMODE again to clear the screen.
To turn on the PBC
Follow the above steps 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly
until “PBC” appear.
Limitations on display.
• The maximum number for display is 15 letters.
Available characters for display are the following:
capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).
• Other characters than those above are replaced in hyphen.
Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files
To playback MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD/USB Mass Storage in the recorded order,
1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® software that records data alphabetically or numerically.
2. Insert two or three digit number in the head of file name. (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).
3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders.
Advanced playback (DVD)
Notes:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change
subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.
• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you
open or close the disc tray.
• In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be
changed immediately.
3
Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® playback
• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD/USB Mass Storage are standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include following
extensions; “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.jpg”, “.div”, “.divx”, “.avi”.
• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD/USB Mass Storage must be correspond to the ISO standardized files.
• This unit can read 600 files per disc. If one directory has more than 600 files, it reads up to 600 files, the remaining files
will be omitted. (In case of USB Mass Storage, this limitation becomes 2,000 files).
• The unit is able to recognize up to a maximum of 50 directories per disc or USB Mass Storage.
• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CDs/USB Mass Storage cannot be used for the purpose of recording.
• If the CD/USB Mass Storage has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files, only audio tracks are played.
• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files depending on its structure.
• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back, the file name is displayed (within 15 letters) on
the screen. Long file names will be condensed.
• The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.
CAUTION:
• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CDs/USB Mass Storage cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.
• The CD-R/RW or USB Mass Storage that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files cannot be played back.
Standard sampling frequency, and the bit rate:
MP3
MPEG-1 Audio
32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)
The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit
rate.
WMA
WMA version 7 and 8
32kHz/48kbps, 44.1kHz/48kbps~192kbps, 48kHz/128kbps~192kbps
The file recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit.
DivX® video
DivX® version: DivX® 3, 4, 5, and 6 (specifically 3.1.1, 4.1.2, 5.0.2, 5.0.5, 5.1.1, 5.2.1, 6.0 at Home Theater profile).
Audio format: MPEG1 Layer2 (MP2), MPEG1 Layer3 (MP3)
Sampling frequencies: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
Bit rate: 32kbps ~ 320kbps
Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps), Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps)
Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trade marks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
56
57
Advanced playback (DVD)
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio
CD operation (Continued)
TOP MENU
ZOOM
DVD MENU
C/D/B/A
ENTER
STOP
PLAY
SKIP
PAUSE/STILL
ANGLE
▲/▼/ /
ENTER
RETURN
STOP
PLAY
DVD/USB
OPEN/CLOSE
+,
75*
1
+,
75*
Loading media
[MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD, Audio CD]
Place a MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD or an Audio
CD onto the disc tray, then press OPEN/CLOSE.
1
MP3/WMA and Audio CD playback
In the file browser, press
desired file.
Press DVD/USB to display the media selection
window. Press B or A to select the DISC
mode or the USB mode, then press ENTER.
DISC
USB
You cannot select the mode if
DISC/USB media is not inserted.
A file browser screen will be appear on the
screen.
!' '() # ( # " '(
# -
$ && && &&
$%
,
!""
# !""
* +
'#
'#
,1$ # ,1
34 5
.'# " /#$$0
.'# " /0
.'# " /12 #0
• In case the current directory includes 9 files or more,
press
or
to scroll in the file list.
• To see contents in folder, select the folder and then
press ENTER. To return to the upstairs directory, select
“ Go Up ...” then press ENTER.
• In case of a CD/USB Mass Storage containing a mixture
of MP3, WMA, JPEG and DivX® files, the files are played
back by selecting them from the file browser.
58
1
!""
!""
Press ENTER.
3
Press STOP to end playback.
In the file browser, press C/D to select the
desired JPEG file.
To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU.
Press B/A or C/D to select the desired file.
(To return to a file browser, press TOP MENU.)
/Picture-01.JPG
Picture-01
Picture-02
Picture-03
Picture-04
Picture-05
Picture-06
Picture-07
Picture-08
When PLAY is pressed after the file browser displayed,
playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In
this case, if the first file is an MP3/WMA file, only MP3/
WMA files are played back in order. If the first file is a
JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first file is
a DivX® file, the first DivX® file is played back. If there is no
file at a root directory, playback does not begin
automatically.
2
+,
75*
JPEG playback
2
• The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears on the
screen. Press PLAY to resume playback (from the scene
point).
• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the unit will
clear the stopped point.
Select Files
The file type to make it display in the file browser can be chosen.
1. Press B or A to highlight “Select Files” at right column
in the file browser.
2. Press ENTER, then press
or
to select file type
from the list (Music, Picture or Movie).
3. Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked file
type will be displayed in the file browser.
4. Press RETURN to save the setting.
:Off
Mode
:Off
JPEG Preview
W: 2048 H: 1536
When PLAY is pressed after displaying the file
browser, playback begins automatically starting
from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a
JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the
first file is a DivX® file, the first DivX® file is
played back. If the first file is an MP3/WMA file,
only MP3/WMA files are played back in order. If
there is no file at a root directory, playback does
not begin automatically.
The selected file starts playing
back.
Notes:
• MP3 or WMA file on the Kodak Picture CD is not recognized
on this unit.
• During MP3/WMA/JPEG-Playback, you cannot use Jump and
A-B Repeat functions.
• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and
Program playback for MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-Playback $ ,
62 .
• At USB mode with no disc on the tray, you can move to DISC
mode when you press OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control.
Select Files
Repeat
Press ENTER. The selected picture appears on
the screen.
Slide show playback
The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after
another automatically.
Preparation:
Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds”
or “15 Seconds” $$ .
1
2
Select your desired starting file for the slide
show in step 1 on the left.
Press ENTER or PLAY to start slide show from
the selected file.
• If you press PAUSE/STILL during the slide show, the
slide show stops temporary. “ 4 ” appears briefly on
the screen.
If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press
ANGLE repeatedly until it’s right side up.
again to resume the slide show.
Press PLAY or SKIP
• When the slide show playback finished, the file list appears.
• To stop the slide show, press STOP. The file list appears.
Notes:
Rotating an image
You can rotate an image by 90 degrees by
pressing ANGLE during playback of the image.
”, “
“
screen.
”, “
” or “
• If the DVD/VCR is connected to a HDTV using HDMI, you
can display the HD resolution JPEG images (720p or
1080i). See “HD Jpeg” on page $& .
• During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B
Repeat functions.
Advanced playback (DVD)
3
to select the
[USB Mass Storage]
Connect USB Mass Storage to the USB port on
the front of the unit (see page $ ).
2
/
+,
75*
” appears on the
Zooming an image
Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG
files. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming” # ).
3
Press STOP to end playback.
The file browser appears on the
screen. If you want to watch the
other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.
59
Advanced playback (DVD)
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio
CD operation (Continued)
+,
75*
1
Playing DivX® VOD content
DivX® playback
Press C/D to select desired DivX® file.
!"#$
%&'( &)*
When PLAY has been pressed after displaying
the file browser, playback begins automatically
starting from the first file. In this case, if the first
file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played
back. If the first file is a DivX® file, the first DivX®
file is played back. If the first file is an MP3/WMA
file, only MP3/WMA file are played back in order.
If there is no file at a root directory, playback does
not begin automatically.
2
▲/▼
ENTER
STOP
PLAY
Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected DivX®
movie will be played back on the screen.
DivX® VOD content is protected by DRM (Digital Rights
Management) system. This restricts playback of content to
specific registered devices.
If the incorrect DRM file is
loaded, “Authorization
Error This player is not
authorized to play this
video.” will appear on the
screen.
When you attempt to play
DivX® VOD, the number of
plays is limited and the right message will appear on
the screen. If you wish to play it, select “YES”.
+,
75*
1
Repeat playback (CD/USB)
In the file browser, press B/A or C/D to select
“Repeat” during stop mode.
+,
75*
1
Random playback (CD/USB)
In the file browser, press B/A or C/D to select
“Mode” during stop mode.
Select Files
Folder-1
Folder-2
Repeat
:Off
MP3-1
MP3-2
Mode
:Off
MP3-3
2
Press ENTER to select “Track” or “All”.
2
Folder-2
MP3-1
Repeat
:Track
Mode
:Off
MP3-2
MP3 3
The unit automatically starts repeat
playback after finishing the current
track.
To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Press STOP to end playback.
The file browser appears on the
screen. If you want to watch the
other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.
3
!"
Press PLAY.
Advanced playback (DVD)
3
Press PLAY.
Press ENTER to select “Random”.
Select Files
Folder-1
• If the number of plays goes over the limit, then
“Rental Expired” will be displayed, in this case the
file will not be played.
Notes:
• In order to play DivX® VOD content on this unit, you first need
to register the unit with registration code. See page 69 .
• This unit cannot playback the DivX® VOD content on the USB
Mass Storage.
3
▲/▼/ /
ENTER
PLAY
SKIP
/
The Random playback will start.
To resume normal playback
Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.
Notes:
• The program is canceled when you open the disc tray or
turn the power off.
• In case of Audio CD, the function of A-B Repeat can be
used. See “A-B Repeat playback” # .
or
• Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP
is pressed.
60
61
Advanced playback (DVD)
Function setup (DVD)
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio
CD operation (Continued)
Customizing the function settings
You can change the default settings to customize performance
to your preference.
C/D/B/A
▲/▼/ /
ENTER
PLAY
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
+,
75*
1
DVD
VCD
CD
Program playback (CD/USB)
In the file browser, press B/A or C/D to select
“Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.
4
Press C/D to select “Program View”, then
press ENTER. Program View shows only the
programed files that you have added in Step 2.
1
Setting procedure
Press SETUP during stop mode.
The following on-screen display
appears.
Parental
DRC
E.B.L.
Menu
Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3 3
Repeat
:Off
Mode
:Off
Edit Mode
When “Edit Mode” is black color,
you can mark the files which you
want to add into Program list.
2
Press B/A or C/D to select the file you want to
add into the program list.
Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3
WMA-1
WMA 2
Repeat
Mode
:Off
JPEG Interval
: 5 Seconds
Screen Saver
: On
back to step 2 by pressing B
repeatedly.
JPEG Preview
Press C or D to select the desired section, then
press B or A.
6
To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP or
RETURN.
: Off
English
QSound
Subtitle
TV
Screen
Set Password
: 4:3
English
On
Output
Audio
Display
: On
Interlace
English
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto
JPEG Interval
: Off
Screen Saver
: On
JPEG Preview
Program View
Add To Program
Program View
5
In the Program View, press PLAY. The files
start to playback in programmed order that
were added by you.
3
First option will be highlighted. Press C or D
to select the desired option.
Parental
DRC
Menu
E.B.L.
: Off
English
QSound
Subtitle
TV
Screen
Set Password
: 4:3
English
On
Output
Audio
Display
: Interlace
On
English
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto
To remove file from program list
In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select the files
you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear
Program” and press ENTER. Marked file is removed
from program list.
4
JPEG Interval
: Off
Screen Saver
: On
Then press A or ENTER. The selectable
settings will appear.
Parental
DRC
Menu
E.B.L.
Function setup (DVD)
Edit Mode
: Off
English
QSound
Subtitle
TV
Screen
Set Password
: English
On
JPEG Preview
• When you finish storing all the files
you want into the Program list,
select “Edit Mode” again and press
ENTER to release edit mode.
62
other option.
• To select another section, go
: Interlace
On
English
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto
Parental
DRC
Menu
E.B.L.
Edit Mode
Press B/A or C/D to select “Add To Program”.
Then press ENTER. All marked files are added
into the program list.
Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3
WMA-1
WMA-2
Output
Display
Audio
Change the selection using C or D, by referring
to the corresponding pages $# ~ 69 .
Press ENTER to save the setting.
• Repeat steps 3 ~ 5 to change
: Off
English
QSound
TV
Subtitle
Screen
Set Password
: 4:3
English
On
Edit Mode
Program View
Add To Program
2
:Off
Press ENTER. Selected file was
marked.
Repeat this procedure to select the
other files.
3
Browser View
Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3
WMA-1
WMA-2
WMA-3
5
Output
Audio
Display
: On
Interlace
English
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto
JPEG Interval
: Off
Screen Saver
: On
63
Function setup (DVD)
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Setting details
Section
Option
Details
Menu
Subtitle
Audio
To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and
“Audio” if more than one language are available on
the disc.
Page
Parental
DRC
E.B.L.
Menu
: Off
English
Parental
DRC
Menu
E.B.L.
: Off
English
QSound
TV
Subtitle
Screen
Set Password
: On
4:3
English
QSound
Subtitle
TV
Screen
Set Password
: 4:3
English
On
Output
Display
Audio
Output
Audio
Display
: On
Interlace
English
: On
English
Interlace
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto
JPEG Interval
: 5 Seconds
JPEG Interval
: Off
Screen Saver
: On
Screen Saver
: On
$#
E.B.L.
To select On or Off for E.B.L. (Enhanced Black
Level).
TV Screen
To select a picture size according to the aspect
ratio of your TV.
Menu, Subtitle, Audio
Display
To turn on or de-activate the operational status display on the screen.
Picture Mode
To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”,
“Film” or “Auto”.
JPEG Interval
To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.
English, Francais, Espanol:
The selected language will be heard or seen.
$$
To select On or Off for Screen Saver function.
DRC
To select On or Off for DRC (Dynamic Range Control).
QSound
To select On or Off for QSound.
Digital Out
To select an output sound format corresponding to
your system connection.
Parental
To select a preferred parental level for the parental
setting.
Password
Input 4-digit password to set the parental level.
HD Jpeg
To select On or Off for HD Jpeg mode.
Output
To select a preferred video output signal from “Interlace” or “Progressive”.
DivX(R) VOD
To display your 8-character registration code.
Other:
Other language can be selected (see the
“Language code list” 71 ).
Original: (Audio)
The unit will select the first priority language of
each disc.
Off: (Subtitle)
Subtitles do not appear.
$%
Notes:
• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the
first-priority language is selected.
• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform
it by VCR MENU & .
To select the black level of playback pictures, set your
preference and monitor’s ability.
Off: Standard grey scale (7.5 IRE cut off)
On: Enhanced grey scale (0 IRE cut off)
TV Screen
You have the following screen sizes to choose from:
4:3
(Letter box):
Select this mode when connecting to a conventional TV. When playing back a wide screen-DVD
disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands
at the top and bottom of screen.
4:3
(Pan scan):
It displays the wide picture on the whole screen
with left and right edges automatically cut off.
16:9
(Wide):
Select this mode when connecting to a widescreen TV. A wide screen picture is displayed full
size.
$&
Function setup (DVD)
Screen Saver
E.B.L.
You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and
“Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto
the disc.
Note:
If the DVD disc is not formatted in the pan & scan style, it
displays 4:3 style.
69
64
65
Function setup (DVD)
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Setting details
Display
JPEG Interval
On screen display can be switched on or off when you
press the buttons.
Off: On screen displays do not appear when you
press any buttons.
On: On screen displays appear when you press
the buttons (factory setting).
Picture Mode
There are two types of source content in pictures
recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures
recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and
video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per
second). Make this selection according to the type of
content being viewed.
Auto:
The DVD player converts film content
pictures in the progressive output
format appropriately. Suitable for
playback of film content pictures. The
progressive output feature will be most
effective under this selection.
Video: The DVD player filters video signal,
and converts it in the progressive
output format appropriately.
Suitable for playback of video content
pictures.
Note:
Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or
doubled. In this case, select “Video”.
66
: Off
English
Subtitle
TV
QSound
Screen
Set Password
: 4:3
English
Off
Output out
Audio
Display
Digital
: PCM
On
Interlace
English
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto
JPEG Interval
: 5 Seconds
Screen Saver
: On
Off:
Plays back one file at a time.
5 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
5 second intervals.
10 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
10 second intervals.
15 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
15 second intervals.
Screen Saver
The screen saver operates when you leave the unit
in DVD stop mode for approx. five minutes.
The screen will repeatedly get dark gradually and
back to normal.
Off:
Screen Saver function is invalidated.
On:
Screen Saver function is made effective.
Digital Out
Selected the output sound format corresponding to your
system connection.
DRC
DRC (Dynamic Range Control) enables you to control
the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for
your equipment.
Off:
It plays back at the recording level on the disc.
On:
Loud sound such as explosion or similar is toned
down slightly when played back. This makes it
suitable for when it is connected to a stereo.
PCM:
Select when connected to a 2 channel digital
stereo amplifier.
Bitstream:
Disc audio bitstream data will be output.
Notes:
• When you make a connection to a TV, or Dolby
Surround Pro Logic or stereo system via the analog
audio jacks, select “PCM” or “Bitstream”.
• If apply HDMI connection to TV, make sure to select
“PCM”, audio signal passing to TV via HDMI cable.
Notes:
• This function works only during playback of Dolby Digital
recorded discs.
• The level of Dynamic Range Reduction may differ
depending on DVD video disc.
QSound
This DVD video player equipped with a “QSound”. It can
produce the effect of being in a cinema or a concert hall.
Function setup (DVD)
Film:
Select this position normally.
The DVD player automatically detects
source content, film or video, of
playback source, and converts that
signal in the progressive output format
in an appropriate method.
Parental
Menu
E.B.L.
DRC
You can continuously playback all JPEG files
automatically.
After the selection below, the disc will start playback on
which JPEG files have been recorded.
Off: The QSound is disengaged.
On: The QSound operates.
Notes:
• The QSound setting can also be changed with AUDIO
on the remote control ## .
• This function works only when the disc recorded with
Dolby Digital is played back.
• When this function works, the volume might changed.
• When the voice is distorted, turn off QSound.
67
Function setup (DVD)
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Setting details
DRC
Menu
E.B.L.
Parental
: Off
English
QSound
Subtitle
TV
Password
Screen
: 4:3
Change
English
On
Audio
Display
HD
Jpeg
: Off
On
English
Picture Mode
Output
: Auto
Interlace
JPEG Interval
DivX(R)
VOD
:5
Display
Seconds
Screen Saver
: On
Parental control setting
Some discs are specified not suitable for children.
Such discs can be limited not to play back with the
unit.
Notes:
• Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit
playback.
• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating
level information though its disc jacket says “adult.” For
those discs, the age restriction will not work.
• The password is required every time when you change
the parental level.
• If you input a wrong number, press CLEAR.
1) Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
2) Remove the disc.
3) Press OPEN/CLOSE again to close the disc tray.
“No Disc” appears on the screen.
4) While holding 7 down on the remote control and
at the same time press STOP on the front panel.
“Password Clear” appears on the screen. Now the
password has been returned to the initial value
(“0000”).
You can select the video output signal of the DVD
video player to the TV from “Interlace” or “Progressive”.
Interlace:
Select when connecting to a composite TV or
a TV equipped with component video inputs
but progressive scan is not compatible.
Progressive:
Select when connecting to a TV equipped
with component video inputs and progressive
scan compatible.
HD Jpeg
This DVD/VCR equipped with a “HD Jpeg”. It can display
the HD resolution JPEG images when the DVD/VCR is
connected to a HDTV using HDMI.
On:
Select when you connect the DVD video player to
a HDTV via HDMI OUT jack. JPEG images is displayed in suitable picture quality (480p, 720p or
.
1080i)
Off:
The picture processing quality is fixed to 480p.
Notes:
• When the DVD/VCR is not connected to a TV using
HDMI, you cannot select “On”.
• When HD Jpeg is set to “On”, zoom function is prohibited
and component video outputs disabled when 480p, 720p
or 1080i is selected.
Warning:
Once “Progressive” is selected when connecting to a
TV progressive scan incompatible, no image will be
seen on the video display.
In this case, you must reset the unit by pressing STOP
on the front panel for five seconds. The video output
will be restored to “Interlace” setting, and a picture will
once again be seen on a conventional analog display.
Notes:
• Some discs may not be played back with the progressive
scanning mode correctly because of the disc characteristics or recording condition.
• Once Progressive scan on, S-video output is disabled.
Function setup (DVD)
1) Press C or D to select “Parental”, then press
ENTER. “Enter Password” screen will appear.
2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9).
(Please note, this is pre-setting password of this
unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list will
appear.
• Level Off: The parental control setting does not
function.
• Level 8: Virtually all DVD software can be
played back.
• Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be
played back.
3) Press C or D to select from the level 1 to level 8.
The limitation will be more severe as the level
number is lower. Then press ENTER.
4) Press OPEN/CLOSE to activate Parental control
setting.
Output
If you forget the password...
DivX® VOD
In order to play DivX® VOD (Video On Demand)
content on this unit, you first need to register the unit
with your DivX® VOD content provider. You do this by
generating a DivX® VOD registration code, which you
submit to your provider.
Press C or D to select “DivX(R) VOD”. Then press
ENTER. Your 8-character registration code is
displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need
it when you register with a DivX® VOD provider.
Then press ENTER to select Done.
Set the new password
1) Press C or D to select “Password”, then press
ENTER. “Enter Current Password” screen will
appear.
2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current
password (If the password has not been set yet
after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).
3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen
will appear. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input
the new password.
4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been
set. Be sure to remember this number!
Note:
If each setup (pages $# ~ 69 ) has been completed, the unit
can always be worked under the same conditions (especially with DVD discs).
Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn
the power off.
68
69
Function setup (DVD)
Others
Temporary disabling of rating level by DVD disc
Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating
level that you have set.
It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.
0–9
Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” $# .
ENTER
RETURN
PLAY
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
1
2
3
Temporary disabling of rating level by DVD disc
Load a DVD disc and press PLAY or OPEN/
CLOSE on the unit "% .
If the DVD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen which
follows the “Reading” screen will change,
depending on which disc is played. If you
select “YES” with the ENTER key, password
input screen will then appear.
Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9).
Then press ENTER.
To exit from the entry, press
RETURN.
70
Playback will commence if the entered
password was correct.
Note:
This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the
disc is ejected.
When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again
automatically.
Language Name Code
Language Name Code
Language Name Code
Abkhazian
1112
Fiji
1620
Lingala
2224
Language Name Code
Singhalese
2919
Afar
1111
Finnish
1619
Lithuanian
2230
Slovak
2921
Afrikaans
1116
French
1628
Macedonian
2321
Slovenian
2922
Albanian
2927
Frisian
1635
Malagasy
2317
Somali
2925
Amharic
1123
Galician
1722
Malay
2329
Spanish
1529
Arabic
1128
Georgian
2111
Malayalam
2322
Sundanese
2931
Armenian
1835
German
1415
Maltese
2330
Swahili
2933
Assamese
1129
Greek
1522
Maori
2319
Swedish
2932
Aymara
1135
Greenlandic
2122
Marathi
2328
Tagalog
3022
Azerbaijani
1136
Guarani
1724
Moldavian
2325
Tajik
3017
Bashkir
1211
Gujarati
1731
Mongolian
2324
Tamil
3011
Basque
1531
3030
Hausa
1811
Nauru
2411
Tatar
Bengali; Bangla 1224
Hebrew
1933
Nepali
2415
Telugu
3015
Bhutani
1436
Hindi
1819
Norwegian
2425
Thai
3018
Bihari
1218
Hungarian
1831
Oriya
2528
Tibetan
1225
Breton
1228
Icelandic
1929
Panjabi
2611
Tigrinya
3019
Bulgarian
1217
Indonesian
1924
Pashto, Pushto 2629
Tonga
3025
Burmese
2335
Interlingua
1911
Persian
1611
Turkish
3028
Byelorussian
1215
Irish
1711
Polish
2622
Turkmen
3021
Cambodian
2123
Italian
1930
Portuguese
2630
Twi
3033
Catalan
1311
Japanese
2011
Quechua
2731
Ukrainian
3121
Chinese
3618
Javanese
2033
Rhaeto-Romance 2823
Urdu
3128
Corsican
1325
Kannada
2124
Romanian
2825
Uzbek
3136
Croatian
1828
Kashmiri
2129
Russian
2831
Vietnamese
3219
Czech
1329
Kazakh
2121
Samoan
2923
Volapük
3225
Danish
1411
Kirghiz
2135
Sanskrit
2911
Welsh
1335
Dutch
2422
Korean
2125
Scots Gaelic
1714
Wolof
3325
English
1524
Kurdish
2131
Serbian
2928
Xhosa
3418
2019
Esperanto
1525
Laothian
2225
Serbo-Croatian 2918
Yiddish
Estonian
1530
Latin
2211
Shona
2924
Yoruba
3525
Faroese
1625
Latvian, Lettish 2232
Sindhi
2914
Zulu
3631
Others
4
Language code list
71
Others
Troubleshooting
Specifications
Before calling a service technician, please check the following table for a possible cause of the symptoms and some solutions.
General
Symptoms
Page
Solutions
DVD/VCR
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in.
• Try another AC outlet.
• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.
• Select the DVD or VCR mode before operating.
• Antenna connection is not correct or antenna cable is disconnected.
• The video channel is not in the correct position or the TV is not set to the video
channel 3 or 4.
• Check the unit is connected correctly.
• The video input selector of the TV is not set to VIDEO. Set to VIDEO (or
equivalent).
• Channel is set to the external mode.
• Press HDMI to turn off the HDMI mode.
5
–
5
35,47
16~19
27
No sound.
• Check the unit is connected correctly.
• Check the input selector of the amplifier is set properly.
• The unit is in the Special playback mode.
16~26
–
36,49
The remote control does not function.
• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.
• Operate within Approx. 7 Meters or reduce the light in the room.
• Clear the path of the beam.
• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.
• Check the batteries are inserted correctly.
No Cable TV reception.
• Check all Cable TV connections.
• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station.
DVD/VCR does not operate.
No picture.
Power supply
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions
Tuner
16~26
–
–
22
13
18,19
VCR
TV recording does not work.
• The erase prevention tab of the video cassette is broken off.
• The unit is in the external input mode.
34,39
Timer recording does not work.
• The time is not set correctly.
• The recording start/end time is not set correctly.
• The TIMER REC has not been pressed ( is not lit).
29~31
42
42
Noise bars on screen.
• Tracking adjustment beyond range of automatic tracking circuit. Try Manual
tracking adjustment.
• Video heads are dirty.
• The tape is worn or damaged.
Input/Output
36
DVD/VCR
36
–
Video input
Video output
Audio input
Audio output
DVD
Display is not shown in your language.
• Select proper language in the menu options.
65
Playback doesn’t start.
• No disc is inserted.
• The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc.
• The unit cannot play DVD-ROMs, etc.
47
7
7
Stopping playback, slow-motion play, repeat
play, or memory play, etc. cannot be
• Some discs may not do some of the functions.
performed.
Antenna input/output
RF channel output
Color system
Video head
Audio track
Hi-Fi frequency response
Hi-Fi dynamic range
FWD/REV time at 25˚C (77˚F)
Applicable disc
Frequency range
S/N ratio
Harmonic distortion
Wow and flutter
Operating conditions
–
AC 120 V 60 Hz
Operation: 20 W, Stand by: 2 W
7.7 lbs (3.5 kg)
Width: 16-15/16 inches (430.6 mm)
Height: 3-9/16 inches (89.7 mm)
Depth: 9 inches (228.7 mm)
181 channel freq. synthesized
VHF
2-13
UHF
14-69
Cable TV 113 Channels
UHF/VHF In/Out: 75 1 coaxial
Channel 3 or 4, Switchable
NTSC
4 Rotary heads
Hi-Fi sound - 2 Tracks / MONO sound - 1 Track
20 Hz to 20 kHz
More than 90dB
Approx. 1 minute and 48 seconds (with T-120 Cassette Tape)
DVD (12 cm, 8 cm), CD (12 cm, 8 cm)
DVD: 4 Hz-22 kHz, CD: 4 Hz-20 kHz
85dB (DVD)
0.06% (DVD)
Less than 0.01% Wrms
Temperature: 5˚C-40˚C (41˚F-104˚F), Operating status: Horizontal
1.0 V (p-p), 75 1, negative sync., pin jack x 2
1.0 V (p-p), 75 1, negative sync., pin jack x 1
–8 dBm, 50 k1, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2
–8 dBm, 1 k1, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 1
DVD
S-video output
Component video output
No picture, or the screen is blurred or divided • The PROGRESSIVE scan is “On” although the unit is connected to a TV
via the VIDEO OUT or the S-VIDEO OUT jack.
into two parts.
69
No 4:3 (16:9) picture.
• The setup does not match your TV.
65
No on-screen display.
• Set Display to “On”.
66
No surround sound.
• The setup does not match your stereo system.
67
The unit or remote operation key is not
functioning.
Playback does not start when the title is
selected.
• Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes, then replug it.
–
• Check the Parental setup.
68,70
Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle language
is not changed when you playback a DVD.
• Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc.
55,56
No subtitle.
• Some discs have no subtitles.
• Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE.
56
• This model complies with the above specifications.
Angle cannot be changed.
• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc.
54
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
“X” appears on the screen.
• The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc.
49
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.
Audio output (COAXIAL DIGITAL)
Audio output (ANALOG)
Others
(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 1, negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1
(C) 0.286 V (p-p), 75 1
(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 1, negative sync., pin jack x 1
(PB)/(PR) 0.7 V (p-p), 75 1, pin jack x 2
0.5 V (p-p), 75 1, pin jack x 1
–12 dBm, 1 k1, pin jacks (L/R) x 1
Supplied accessories
Audio/video cable ................................................. 1
Remote control (SE-R0221) ................................. 1
Batteries (R03/AAA) ............................................. 2
75 1 coaxial cable ................................................ 1
72
73
Others
Memo
- IMPORTANT CANADIAN WARRANTY INFORMATION
GARANTIE CANADIENNE
STANDARD WARRANTY
TYPE OF SET
WARRANTY PERIOD
DVD Player
DVD/VCR Combination
Home Theatre in a Box
DVD Recorder
Portable DVD
12 MONTHS
CANADIAN WARRANTY
Toshiba of Canada Limited (TCL) makes the following
limited warranties to original consumers in Canada.
Please retain your “Bill of Sale” as proof of purchase.
To obtain a “Canadian Warranty” please register
online at www.toshiba.ca.
Canadian Warranty Information
Should service be required on this unit during the one year
warranty period, TCL's option will be to repair or exchange the
defective unit. It will be necessary to follow this procedure:
Contact: Toshiba of Canada Limited at the Consumer
Electronics Group, customer support line.
Phone: 1-800-268-3404
Email:
[email protected]
All in-warranty repairs must be made by an authorized TCL
service centre.
DURÉE DE LA GARANTIE:
Lecteur DVD
DVD/magnétoscope combo
Cinéma maison dans une boîte
Enregistreur DVD
DVD Portatif
12 MOIS
GARANTIE CANADIENNE
1) Toshiba du Canada Limitée (TCL) offre au Canada les
garanties limitées suivantes aux consommateurs originaux. Veuillez conserver votre « facture » comme preuve
d’achat. Pour obtenir une garantie canadienne,
veuillez vous inscrire en ligne à www.toshiba.ca
Information sur la garantie Canadienne
Si vous avez besoin de service sur cet appareil au cours le
l'année de garantie, Toshiba du Canada Limitée aura l'option
de réparer ou échanger l'appareil défectueux. Vous devrez
suivre la procédure suivante:
Contact: Toshiba du Canada Limitée au Groupe Électronique
aux consommateurs, service à la clientèle.
Tél:
1-800-268-3404
Courriel: [email protected]
Toutes les réparations au cours de la garantie doivent être faites
par un centre de service autorisé Toshiba.
Pour un échange TCL s'assurera qu'un service de courrier
ramassera l'unité et qu'un appareil de remplacement soit
expédié par le même service de courrier.
(Note: Un numéro de carte de crédit sera requis car une
charge de 25,00$ sera appliquée si toutefois l’appareil n’avait
aucun problème de fonctionnement.)
Une nouvelle unité sera fournie comme remplacement durant
les premiers 3 mois de propriété. Par contre durant la balance
de la garantie une unité remise à neuf sera fournie.
La «facture originale doit être fournie comme preuve d’achat
(elle vous sera retournée avec l’unité de remplacement.)
Cette garantie de 12 mois sera strictement adhérée.
Les unités hors de garantie devraient être réparées par un
centre de service autorisé Toshiba.
Note: C’est la responsabilité du propriétaire de s’assurer que
l’emballage est adéquat. Vous serez facturé pour toutes réparations causées par des dommages encourus à cause d’un
emballage non adéquat.
Cette garantie est octroyée à l’acheteur initial et n’est pas
transférable. Cette garantie ne s’aplique pas aux appareils qui
ont été sujets aux abus, négligences, accidents, dommages
physiques ou actes naturels.
Les appareils dont le numéro de série a été enlevé, altéré,
remplacé ou barbouillé ne sont pas couverts par cette
garantie.
Les garanties de TCL sont valides seulement sur les unités
sont achetées et utilisées au Canada d'un marchand autorisé
TCL.
Cette garantie ne couvre pas les produits de location ou à
usage commercial. Cette garantie remplace toutes autres
garanties ou ententes exprimées ou sous-entendues. Aucune
personne, agent, distributeur, concessionaire ou compagnie
n’est autorisé à changer, modifier ou prolonger les termes de
cette garantie de quelque façon que ce soit.
Toshiba of Canada Limited 191 McNabb Street Markham, Ontario L3R 8H2
74
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
Others
For service exchange TCL will arrange to have the unit picked
up by courier and a replacement unit will be returned via same
courier. (Note: A major credit card number will be required as a
charge of $25.00 will apply if no fault is found with the unit.)
During the first 3 months of ownership, a new unit will be supplied as a replacement. During the remainder of the warranty
period a service-renewed unit will be supplied.
The original “Bill of Sale” must be provided as proof of purchase (it will be returned with the replacement unit.)
This 12-month warranty will be strictly adhered to.
Out of warranty units should be repaired by a TCL authorized
service centre.
Note: It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure proper
packaging. Should damage in shipping occur, due to poor
packaging, a charge back for the repair will result.
This warranty applies to the original purchaser only and is not
transferable.
This warranty does not apply to sets that have been subjected
to misuse, neglect, accident, physical damage or acts of
nature.
Sets with the serial number removed, altered, replaced or
defaced will not be covered by this warranty.
The warranties from TCL are effective only if the product is
purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and
operated in Canada.
Products utilized for rental or commercial purposes are not
covered by this warranty.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, guaranties or
agreements, whether expressed or implied, and no person,
agent distributor, dealer, service centre or company is authorized to change, modify or extend its terms in any manner
whatsoever.
GARANTIE NORMALE
TYPE D’APPAREIL
75
CAUTION
THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.
TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,
CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.
USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.
VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT
STARE INTO BEAM.
Location of the required Marking
The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.
CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.
PREPARATION OF SERVICING
The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.
Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the
time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened.
Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode
at the time of repair.
• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.
• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.
• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.
A1-1
IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION
Safety precautions to be followed during servicing:
1. Parts marked with an
are critical parts for safety. Replace only with the one described in the parts
list.
2. Before returning the DVD product to the customer, make the appropriate leakage current check or
resistance measurements to ensure that exposed parts are properly insulated from the supply circuit.
A leakage current check is recommended for this unit. Plug the AC line cord directly into a 120V 60Hz AC
outlet (do not use an isolation transformer for this check). Use a leakage current tester (Fig. 1) or a
metering system which complies with Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1492). Measure for current from all
exposed metal parts of the cabinet to a known earth ground: particularly, any exposed metal part having a
return path to the chassis. Any current measured must not exceed 0.5mA. Any measurement not within
the limits outlined above are indicative of a potential shock hazard and corrective action must be taken
before returning the unit to the customer.
(Reading should not be above 0.5mA)
PRODUCT UNDER TEST
2-Blade polarized
type cord set
Test all exposed
metal surfaces
1.5K ohm
0.15 µF
Leakage Current Tester
TEST PROBE
Fig. 1 AC Leakage Test
A1-2
KNOWN EARTH
GROUND
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
8A.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
READ INSTRUCTIONS
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.
RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
HEED WARNINGS
All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
CLEANING
Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp
cloth for cleaning.
ATTACHMENTS
Do not use attachments not recommended by the unit’s manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
WATER AND MOISTURE
Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet
basement, or near a swimming pool.
PORTABLE CART WARNING
ACCESSORIES
(symbol provided by RETAC)
Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The
unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit. Use only
with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer.
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops,
excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart
combination to overturn.
S3125A
VENTILATION
Slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable
operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The
openings should never be blocked by placing the unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit
should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions
have been adhered to.
POWER SOURCES
This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not sure
of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For units
intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION
This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other).
This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug
fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. If your unit is equipped with a 3-wire
grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, this plug will only fit into a grounding-type power
outlet. This too, is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to
replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.
POWER-CORD PROTECTION
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon
or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they
exit from the appliance.
LIGHTNING
To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time,
unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the unit
due to lightning and power line surges.
POWER LINES
An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or
power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system,
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be
fatal.
OVERLOADING
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY
Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out
parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.
A1-3
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
(CONTINUED)
17. OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting
structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of
antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
18. SERVICING
Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage
or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
19. DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE
Unplug this unit from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following
conditions:
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.
c. If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that
are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal
operation.
e. If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f. When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.
20. REPLACEMENT PARTS
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the
manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original parts.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
21. SAFETY CHECK
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.
22. WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING
The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
23. HEAT
The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24. DISC TRAY
Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.
25. CONNECTING
When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the
wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's manual of
the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.
26. SOUND VOLUME
Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume sound
may cause hearing or speaker damage.
27. SOUND DISTORTION
Do not allow the product output distorted sound for a longtime. It may cause speaker overheating and fire.
28. HEADPHONES
When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continuously
with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.
29. LASER BEAM
Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser
beam. It may cause sight damage.
30. DISC
Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious
personal injury and product malfunction.
31. NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the
grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
A1-4
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
(CONTINUED)
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
ANTENNA LEAD
IN WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
ELECTRIC SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A
A1-5
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK
[ When removing the DVD Deck ]
Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1
using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
[ When installing the DVD Deck ]
Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD
PCB connector.
NOTE
• Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.
• Use the Lead Free solder.
• Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 350 ± 5˚C
• Soldering time: Within 2 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
• When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the
Flux smoke away from it.
Pick Up PCB
Short circuit using a
soldering iron.
Fig. 1
A1-6
TAPE REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY
1. Remove the Top Cabinet, Front Cabinet and DVD Block. (Refer to item 1 of the
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)
2. Remove the screw 1 of the Deck Chassis and remove the Loading Motor. (Refer to Fig. 2)
3. Rotate the Pinch Roller Cam in the direction of the arrow by hand to slacken the Video Tape.
4. Rotate the Clutch Ass'y either derection to wind the Video Tape in the Cassette Case.
5. Repeat steps 3~4. Then take out the Video Cassette from the Deck Chassis. Be careful not to scratch the
tape.
Loading Motor
Screw 1
Capstan DD Unit
Pinch Roller Cam
Main Cam
Clutch Ass'y
Fig. 1
Main Chassis (Front Side)
Fig. 2
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY
1. Remove the Top and Front Cabinet. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)
2. Rotate the Main Gear in the direction of the arrow by hand.
(Refer to Fig. 1)
3. Manually open the Tray.
Main Gear
DVD Deck
Fig. 1
A1-7
PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL
4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION
If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Turn Unit ON.
Set the DVD Mode.
Confirm that the 'No Disc' will be appeared on the screen.
Press and hold the '7' key on the remote control unit.
Simultaneously press and hold the 'STOP' key on the front panel.
Hold both keys for more than 3 seconds.
The On Screen Display message 'PASSWORD CLEAR' will appear.
The 4 digit password has now been cleared
TRAY LOCK
Tray cannot be opened by setting the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn Unit ON.
Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
Press it in order of 'SETUP', 'SUBTITLE', '3', 'AUDIO' and '0' key of a remote control unit.
The On Screen Display message '
' will appear.
The Tray Lock has now been set up.
To unlock the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn Unit ON.
Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
Press it in order of 'SETUP', 'SUBTITLE', '3', 'AUDIO' and '0' key of a remote control unit.
The On Screen Display message '
' will appear.
The Tray Lock has now been cleared.
A1-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
• LEAD-FREE SOLDER
• OWNER'S MANUAL
CAUTION ....................................................................................................................................
PREPARATION OF SERVICING ...............................................................................................
IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION ...................................................................
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .....................................................................................................
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ...............................................................................................
TAPE REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY .............................................................
PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ..................................................................................
TRAY LOCK ................................................................................................................................
TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS ..............................................
2.REMOVAL OF VCR DECK PARTS .....................................................................................
3.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS .....................................................................................
4.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC .................................................
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................
SERVICE MODE LIST ................................................................................................................
PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS ..............................................................
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC ..........................................................................
RF SIGNAL CHECK OF DVD MT PCB .....................................................................................
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS .......................................................................................
PREPARATION FOR SERVICING .............................................................................................
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................................
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................................
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................................................................................................
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
DVD ..........................................................................................................................................
VCR ..........................................................................................................................................
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
DVD MT/USB ...........................................................................................................................
VCR MT/OPERATION/OPERATION 2 ...................................................................................
LOADING MOTOR/SW ...........................................................................................................
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP .................................................................................................
MEMORY .................................................................................................................................
MOTOR DRIVE .......................................................................................................................
AUDIO/VIDEO .........................................................................................................................
HDMI/USB ...............................................................................................................................
Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP .................................................................................................
SYSCON ..................................................................................................................................
TUNER/JACK ..........................................................................................................................
OPERATION/DISPLAY ...........................................................................................................
Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR ............................................................................................................
POWER ...................................................................................................................................
OPERATION/LED ....................................................................................................................
LOADING MOTOR/SW ...........................................................................................................
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................
WAVEFORMS .............................................................................................................................
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW .............................................................................................
CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW .....................................................................................................
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................................
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST .........................................................................
CHASSIS REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ..................................................................................
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...............................................................................
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...........................................................................
A2-1
A1-1
A1-1
A1-2
A1-3~A1-5
A1-6
A1-7
A1-7
A1-8
A1-8
A2-1
A3-1~A3-5
B1-1, B1-2
B2-1~B2-6
B3-1~B3-4
B4-1, B4-2
C1-1, C1-2
C2-1
C3-1, C3-2
C4-1
C4-2
C4-3
D1-1
D1-1
D2-1~D2-4
D3-1, D3-2
E-1~E-34
F-1, F-2
F-3, F-4
G-1,G-2
G-3~G-6
G-7, G-8
H-1, H-2
H-3, H-4
H-5, H-6
H-7, H-8
H-9, H-10
H-11, H-12
H-13, H-14
H-15, H-16
H-17, H-18
H-19, H-20
H-21, H-22
H-23, H-24
H-25, H-26
H-27, H-28
I-1, I-2
J1-1, J1-2
J2-1, J2-2
J3-1
K1-1
K2-1
K3-1
K4-1~K4-5
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-1
G-2
Outline of the product
DVD System
Color System
Disc
Disc Diameter
Drive
Search speed
Actual
Actual
Slow speed
Actual
Actual
G-3
VCR
System
System
Video System
Hi-Fi STEREO
NTSC PB(PAL60Hz)
Deck
Heads
Video Head
FM Audio Head
Audio / Control
Erase (Full Track Erase)
Erase (Normal Audio Track Erase)
Tape
Rec
PAL
Speed
NTSC
Play
PAL
NTSC
Fast Forward / Rewind Time (Approx.) at 25oC
with Cassette
G-4
Tuning
System
Forward/Reverse
Picture Search
Frame Advance
Slow Speed
Broadcasting System
Tuner and
Receive CH
Intermediate
Frequency
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
NTSC or PAL-M
PAL or SECAM
System
Destination
CH Coverage
Picture (FP)
Sound (FS)
FP-FS
Preset CH
RF Converter Output
Channel
Level / Impedance
Sound Selector
Stereo / Dual TV Sound
Tuner Sound Muting
Power
Power Source
AC
DC
Power Consumption
Stand by
Per Year
Energy Star
Protector
Power Fuse
Safety Circuit
IC Protector(Micro Fuse)
Regulation
Safety
Radiation
Laser
Temperature
Operation
Storage
Operating Humidity
A3-1
DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VHS Player / Recorder
NTSC
DVD, CD-DA, CD-R/RW, VIDEO CD,
SVCD, DVD-R/RW (VIDEO FORMAT ONLY)
120 mm , 80 mm
DM3SA
Fwd
4 steps
2-120 times (DVD, VIDEO CD, SVCD)
4-40 times (CD)
Rev
4 steps
2-120 times (DVD, VIDEO CD, SVCD)
4-40 times (CD)
Fwd
1/7-1/2 times
-Rev
--VHS Player / Recorder
NTSC
Yes
No
OVD-7S
4Head
2Head
Mono/Yes
Yes
No
SP/SLP(EP)
SP/SLP(EP)
FF:1'48"/REW:1'48"
T-120
SP/LP/SLP(EP) = 3x,5x / 7x,9x / 9x,15x
Yes
1/10
US System M
1Tuner
US (w/CABLE)
2-69,4A,A-5~ A-1,A~I,
J~ W, W+1-W+84
45.75 MHz
41.25 MHz
4.50 MHz
Yes
3 or 4 ch
66 dBu / 75 Ohm
No
US-ST
Yes
120V 60Hz
20 W at 120V 60Hz
2 W at 120V 60Hz
-- W
No
Yes
Yes
No
UL / CSA
FCC / IC
DHHS
5oC - 40oC
-20oC - 60oC
Less than 80% RH
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-9
Signal
Video Signal
RGB Signal
Audio Signal
Output Level
S/N Ratio (Weighted)
Horizontal Resolution
Output Level
Input Level Microphone
Input Level Line
Output Level Line
Hi-Fi Audio Signal
G-10
G-11
OSD Language
Clock,Timer
and Timer
Back-up
G-12
Display
Digital Output Level
S/N Ratio at (Weighted)
Harmonic Distortion (1KHz)
Typical
Frequency Response : DVD Mode at DVD
DVD Mode at VIDEO CD/SVCD
DVD Mode at CD
VCR Mode at SP
VCR Mode at LP
VCR Mode at SLP
Dynamic Range : More than
Frequency Response
Wow And Flutter : Less than
Channel Separation : More than
Harmonic Distortion : Less than
Calendar
Timer Events
One Touch Recording Max Time
Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode)
DISPLAY
DISPLAY type
Clock/Counter,CH,Timer Rec,
OTR,Play,Rec,FF(Cue),Rew(Rev),
Stop,ATR,Eject
VCR
DVD
CD
Clock
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (12h)
AM
PM
Counter
VCR
DVD
CD
Eject
Counter Remain
Play
Stop
Rec
FF / Cue
REW / Review
Pause / Still
OTR (ITR)
T-Rec
Chapter
TITLE
TRACK
Repeat
Hi-Fi
SP
LP
SLP
CH
RF Output CH
Tape In
Remocon Custom Code
Progressive Scan Out
A3-2
1 V p-p/75 ohm (DVD,VCR)
65 dB(DVD)
50 dB(VCR)
500 Lines (DVD)
230 Lines(VCR Mode)
-8 dBm/ 50k ohm (VCR, 0dBm=0.775Vrms)
-8 dBm/ 1k ohm (VCR, 0dBm=0.775Vrms)
-12dBm/ 1k ohm (DVD, -20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)
0.5 V p-p / 75 ohm(DVD)
85dB(DVD), 42dB(VCR at SP)
0.06% (1KHz) (DVD) , 1.5% (1KHz) (VCR)
4 Hz - 22 KHz
4 Hz - 20 KHz
4 Hz - 20 KHz
100Hz - 10 KHz
100Hz - 4 KHz
90dB
20Hz ~20kHz
0.01 %Wrms
60 dB
0.01
English / French / Spanish
1990/1/1 ~ 2081/12/31
8 Program/ 1 Month
6 Hours
5sec
Yes
LED Module (Green, "Rec" &Timer symbol = Red)
No
Yes
Yes (hour:min)
Yes (hour:min)
Yes (min:sec)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-13
Remote
Control
Unit
Glow in Dark Remocon
Remocon Format
Format
Custom Code
Power Source
Total Keys
Keys
Voltage(D.C)
UM size x pcs
DVD/VCR
TV
CABLE BOX
Power
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY/CALL
100
JUMP/ZERO RETURN
ZOOM/CM SKIP
CH+
CHVol.+
Vol.Input Select
Input Select / PROGRESSIVE
PROGRAM
TITLE (TOP MENU)
DVD MENU(MENU)
UP/ SET+ / TRACKING+
DOWN/ SET- / TRACKINGLEFT/CHRIGHT/CH+
SELECT/ENTER
CLEAR/CANCEL
RETURN
PAUSE/STILL/STEP
PLAY
STOP
SKIP- / INDEXREW(Review)/SEARCHFF(Cue)/SEARCH+
SKIP+ / INDEX+
SETUP MENU/VCR MENU
MARKER
CLOCK / COUNTER
SLOW (Forward)
ANGLE/COUNTER RESET
SUBTITLE/ATR
AUDIO / AUDIO SELECT
HDMI
PLAY MODE/SPEED
REPEAT A-B/ DVD/USB
TV/VCR
DVD/VCR SELECT
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
T-REC
REC/OTR
A3-3
RC-LM
Yes
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
45-BA
3V
UM-4 x 2 pcs
56 Key
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-14
Features
(DVD)
Auto Power Off
Video CD Playback
SVCD Playback
MP3 Playback
WMA Playback
JPEG Playback
DivX Play back
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 DMF Support
Progressive Scan Out
HD JPEG
HDMI Out
USB
Card slot
Digital Out
Down Mix Out
Features
(VCR)
G-15
Accessories
Dolby Digital
MPEG
PCM
DTS
(Dolby Digital)
(DTS)
Surround
E.B.L. (Enhanced Black Level)
Screen Saver
Tray Lock
Auto Stop
Audio DAC
Closed Caption signal in VBI (DVD Playback)
Auto Head Cleaning
Auto Power Off
Forward/Reverse Picture Search
VIDEO PLUS+ (SHOWVIEW, G-CODE)
CH Set-Up Add/Delete
One Touch Playback
Clock Set
Auto CH Memory
AREA CODE
Auto Clock Set
Index Search
SQPB
CATV
MTS (SAP)
CM Skip (30sec x 6 Times)
Copy (Disc to Tape)
Owner's Manual
Language
w/Guarantee Card
Remote Control Unit
Guarantee Card
Registration Card
Warning Sheet
Service Station List
Important Tag
AC Plug Adapter
Quick Set-up Sheet
Battery
UM size x pcs
AC Cord
AV Cord (1.2m)
75 Ohm Coaxial Cable (Single Shield)
HDMI Cable
S-Video Cable
21pin cable
800 No Sticker
Toll Free Insert Sheet
Safety Tip
Information Sheet (Return)
Netflix Card
PVC Warning Sheet
A3-4
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Some USB devices may not be usable.)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Q Sound
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
192kHz / 24bit
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes (Calendar 12H)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (by Conditioning)
English / French
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
UM-4 x 2 pcs
No
Yes
Yes (0.9m)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-16
Interface
Switch
Front
Rear
Terminals
Front
Rear
Power
Play
Eject (VCR)
Stop
Rec/OTR
Open/Close (DVD)
CH +
CH FF/ Search(>>)
Rew/Search(<<)
Still/Pause
Shuttle (Search/REV/FWD)
DVD/VCR
Main Power SW
Attenuator
S-Video/Component Video Selector
RF Out (Slide SW)
Main Power SW
Video In
Audio In
USB
Video Output
Audio Output
Indicator
G-17
G-18
Set Size
Weight
G-19
Carton
Optical Out (Option)
Video Input (Option)
Audio Input (Option)
RF Input / Output
Euro Scart
HDMI Output
AC Inlet
LED
Power
Rec
T-Rec
TV/VCR
DVD
VCR
Surround
Level Meter
Approx.
W x D x H (mm)
Net (Approx.)
Gross (Approx.)
Master Carton
Content
Material
Dimensions
W x D x H(mm)
Description of Origin
Gift Box
Material
W/Color Photo Label
Dimensions
W x D x H(mm)
Description of Origin
Drop Test
G-20
Material
G-21
Environment
Height (cm)
Container Stuffing
Cabinet
Front
PCB
Non-Halogen Demand
Eyelet Demand
Environmental standard requirement (by buyer)
Pb-free
Measures for Whisker
A3-5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
RCA x 1 (Black/Silver)
RCA x 2 (L/MONO,R Black/Silver)
Yes
RCA x1 (Yellow)
S-Video x 1 (DVD Signal Only)
Component x1 (RCA 3pin, DVD Signal Only)
RCA x 4(L,R White,Red)
Coaxial x 1 (Digital Audio, DVD Signal Only)
Yes
RCA x 1 (Yellow)
RCA x 2 (L/MONO,R
White,Red)
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes (GREEN)
Yes (GREEN)
No
No
430.6 x 228.7 x 89.7
3.5 kg( 7.7lbs)
4.5 kg( 9.9lbs)
No
--- Sets
--- / ------Double / White
No
497 x 340 x 174
Yes
Natural Dropping At 1 Corner / 3 Edges / 6
Surfaces
80 cm
2,015 Sets/40' container
PS 94V2 or More / DECABROM
No
No
Green procurement of TOSHIBA
Phase3(Phase3A)
Yes
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1-3: DVD DECK/DVD MT PCB/USB BLOCK
(Refer to Fig. 1-3)
1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS
AND P.C. BOARDS
1. Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-3 using a
soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no
soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
2. Unlock the support 1 and remove the Deck Top Holder
in the direction of arrow (A).
3. Remove the 2 screws 2.
4. Remove the 2 screws 3.
5. Remove the screw 4.
6. Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP501, CP8001, CP6601).
7. Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (B).
8. Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP2301, CP2302, CP2303).
9. Remove the 2 screws 5.
10. Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
11. Remove the 3 screws 6.
12. Remove the Front Angle in the direction of arrow (D).
13. Remove the 2 screws 7.
14. Remove the USB Block in the direction of arrow (E).
1-1: TOP CABINET/FRONT CABINET/OPERATION PCB/
OPERATION 2 PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-1)
1. Remove the 5 screws 1.
2. Remove the Top Cabinet in the direction of arrow (A).
3. Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP651, CP653).
4. Unlock the 8 supports 2.
5. Remove the Front Cabinet in the direction of arrow (B).
6. Remove the 6 screws 3.
7. Remove the Operation PCB and Operation 2 PCB in the
direction of arrow (C).
1
Top Cabinet
1
1
1
CP653
(A)
5
1
CP2303
Operation 2 PCB
CP6601
3
DVD Deck
3
(C)
CP2302
CP2301
3
(B)
2
2
5
DVD MT PCB
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
(C)
3
3
CP651
(C)
2
2
2
Pick Up PCB
2
Deck Top Holder
Operation PCB
(B)
Front Cabinet
7
Fig. 1-1
1
1-2: FLAP (Refer to Fig. 1-2)
USB Block
(A)
1. Open Flap to 90˚ and flex in direction of arrow (A), at the
same time slide in direction of arrow (B).
2. Then lift in direction of arrow (C).
Short circuit using a
soldering iron.
7
(E)
4
6
6
(D)
CP8001
CP501
(A)
6
Front Angle
Fig. 1-3
(C)
NOTE
(B)
Flap
Fig. 1-2
B1-1
1. Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF
SERVICING”.
2. Use the Lead Free solder.
3. Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 350 ± 5˚C
• Soldering time: Within 2 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
4. When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing
equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke
away from it.
5. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering on
the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up
PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1-4: VCR DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-4)
1-5: VCR MT PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-5)
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not remove the cable at the FE Head section. The FE
Head may be damaged if you remove the cable by force.
Remove the screw 1.
Remove the FE Head.
Move the Cassette Holder Ass’y to the back side.
Remove the 2 screws 2.
Remove the 2 screws 3.
Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP101, CP102, CP3001).
7. Remove the VCR Deck in the direction of arrow.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the screw 1.
Remove the 6 screws 2.
Remove the 2 screws 3.
Remove the Shiel Jack.
Remove the VCR MT PCB in the direction of arrow.
3
3
VCR MT PCB
2
Shield Jack
1
FE Head
1
2
22
2
22
2
VCR Deck
3
Fig. 1-5
3
CP101
CP102
CP3001
Fig. 1-4
B1-2
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2. REMOVAL OF VCR DECK PARTS
2-3: LINK UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-3)
2-1: TOP BRACKET (Refer to Fig. 2-1)
1. Set the Link Unit to the Eject position.
2. Unlock the support 1.
3. Remove the (A) side of the Link Unit first, then remove
the (B) side.
1. Extend the 2 supports 1.
2. Slide the 2 supports 2 and remove the Top Bracket.
NOTE
1. After installation of the Top Bracket, bend the support 1
so that the Top Bracket is fixed.
Main Chassis
Link Unit
Top Bracket
1
1
(A)
(B)
Link Unit
1
Top Bracket
Main Chassis
2
Fig. 2-3
2
Main Chassis
2-4: LINK LEVER/FLAP LEVER (Refer to Fig. 2-4)
Main Chassis
1. Extend the support 1.
2. Remove the Link Lever.
3. Remove the Flap Lever.
Fig. 2-1
2-2: CASSETTE HOLDER ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-2)
1. Move the Cassette Holder Ass'y to the front side.
2. Push the Locker R to remove the Cassette Side R.
3. Remove the Cassette Side L.
Main Chassis
Locker R
Flap Lever
1
Cassette Side R
Link Lever
Fig. 2-4
Link Unit
Cassette Side L
Main Chassis
Fig. 2-2
B2-1
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2-5: LOADING MOTOR/WORM (Refer to Fig. 2-5-A)
2-6: TENSION ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 2-6-B)
1. Remove the screw 1.
2. Remove the Loading Motor.
3. Remove the Worm.
1. Turn the Pinch Roller Cam clockwise so that the Tension
Holder hook is set to the position of Fig. 2-6-A to move
the Tension Arm Ass’y.
2. Remove the Tension Spring.
3. Unlock the 2 supports 1 and remove the Tension Band.
4. Unlock the support 2 and remove the Tension Arm Ass’y.
5. Unlock the support 3 and remove the Tension Connect.
6. Float the hook 4 and turn it clockwise then remove the
Tension Holder.
Loading Motor
Worm
Tension Arm Ass’y
Main Chassis
• Screw Torque: 3 ± 0.5kgf•cm
1
Fig. 2-6-A
Fig. 2-5-A
NOTE
1
1. In case of the Worm installation, check if the value of the
Fig. 2-5-B is correct.
2. In case of the Loading Motor installation, hook the wire on
the Cassette Opener as shown Fig. 2-5-C.
3. When installing the wires between Capstan DD Unit and
Loading Motor, connect them correctly as shown Fig. 2-5-D.
Tension Connect
1
Tension Band
3
Tension Spring
Tension Arm Ass’y
Tension Holder
2
19.2 ± 0.1mm
Safety surface for pressing
of the insert.
4
Fig. 2-6-B
Fig. 2-5-B
NOTE
1. In case of the Tension Band installation, note the direction of the installation. (Refer to Fig. 2-6-C)
2. In case of the Tension Band installation, install correctly
as Fig. 2-6-D.
3. In case of the Tension Connect installation, install as the
circled section of Fig. 2-6-E.
Loading Motor
Cassette Opener
Tension Band
Fig. 2-5-C
Tension Connect
Pink
Fig. 2-6-C
Capstan DD Unit
Loading Motor
-
L2
+
L1
White
Fig. 2-5-D
B2-2
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
[OK]
Tension Connect
1. Take care not to damage the gears of the S Reel and T
Reel.
2. The Polyslider Washer may on the back of the reel.
3. Take care not to damage the shaft.
4. Do not touch section “A” of S Reel and T Reel. (Use
gloves.) (Refer to Fig. 2-8-A) Touching may leave stains
on section "A".
5. When you install the reel, clean the shaft and grease it. (If
you do not grease, noise may be heard in FF/REW
mode.)
6. After installing the reel, adjust the height of the reel.
(Refer to MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT)
Tension Band
[NG]
Tension Connect
Tension Band
Fig. 2-6-D
Tension Connect
Main Chassis
Fig. 2-6-E
Idler Gear
Idler Arm Ass’y
2-7: T BRAKE ARM/T BRAKE BAND (Refer to Fig. 2-7-A)
S Reel
1. Remove the T Brake Spring.
2. Turn the T Brake Arm clockwise and bend the hook
section to remove it.
3. Unlock the 2 supports 1 and remove the T Brake Band.
(B)
T Reel
(A)
1
(A)
T Brake Band
1
Hook section
1
1
T Brake Arm
T Brake Spring
Fig. 2-8-A
NOTE
1. In case of the S Reel and T Reel installation, check if the
correct parts are installed. (Refer to Fig. 2-8-B)
2. In case of the Idler Arm Ass’y installation, install correctly
as Fig. 2-8-C. And also set it so that the section “B” of
Fig. 2-8-A is placed under the Main Chassis tab.
Fig. 2-7-A
NOTE
1. In case of the T Brake Band installation, install correctly
as Fig. 2-7-B.
T Brake Arm
[OK]
T Brake Band
Big Hole
(S Reel)
T Brake Arm
[NG]
Small Hole
(T Reel)
Fig. 2-8-B
T Brake Band
[OK]
Clutch Gear
Fig. 2-7-B
Idler Arm Ass’y
[NG]
2-8: S REEL/T REEL/IDLER ARM ASS’Y/IDLER GEAR
(Refer to Fig. 2-8-A)
Idler Arm Ass’y
1. Remove the S Reel and T Reel.
2. Remove the 2 Polyslider Washers 1.
3. Remove the Idler Arm Ass’y and Idler Gear.
Clutch Gear
Fig. 2-8-C
B2-3
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2-9: CASSETTE OPENER/PINCH ROLLER BLOCK/P5
ARM ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 2-9-A)
1. Unlock the support 1 and remove the Cassette Opener.
2. Remove the Pinch Roller Block and P5 Arm Ass’y.
Cassette Opener
1
Spring Position
Fig. 2-10-B
Pinch Roller Block
2-11: FE HEAD (RECORDER ONLY) (Refer to Fig. 2-11)
P5 Arm Ass’y
1. Remove the screw 1.
2. Remove the FE Head.
Main Chassis
1
Fig. 2-9-A
FE Head
NOTE
1. Do not touch the Pinch Roller. (Use gloves.)
2. In case of the Pinch Roller Block and the Pinch Roller
Cam installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-9-B.
Pinch Roller Block
Can be seen the hole of
the Pinch Roller Cam.
• Screw Torque: 5 ± 0.5kgf•cm
• The FE Head is not installed on the Video Cassette Player.
P5 Arm Ass’y
Fig. 2-11
2-12: CYLINDER UNIT ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-12)
Can be seen the hole of the
Main Cam.
1. Disconnect the following connector:
(CD2001).
2. Remove the 3 screws 1.
3. Remove the Cylinder Unit Ass'y.
Fig. 2-9-B
2-10: A/C HEAD (Refer to Fig. 2-10-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the screw 1.
Remove the A/C Head Base.
Remove the 3 screws 2.
Remove the A/C Head and A/C Head Spring.
NOTE
1. When you install the Cylinder Unit Ass'y, tighten the
screws from (1) to (3) in order while pulling the Ass'y
toward the left front direction.
NOTE
1. Do not touch the A/C Head. (Use gloves.)
2. When you install the A/C Head Spring, install as shown in
Fig. 2-10-B.
3. When you install the A/C Head, tighten the screw (1) first,
then tighten the screw (2), finally tighten the screw (3).
(1)
2
CD2001
Cylinder Unit Ass'y
(3)
2
2
(2)
A/C Head
A/C Head Spring
(3)
1
(2)
1
(1)
1
1
A/C Head Base
• Screw Torque: 5 ± 0.5kgf•cm (Screw 1)
• Screw Torque: 3 ± 0.5kgf•cm
Fig. 2-10-A
B2-4
Fig. 2-12
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2-13: CAPSTAN DD UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-13)
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1. In case of the Pinch Roller Cam and Main Cam installation, install them as shown in the circled section of Fig. 214-B so that the markers meet. (Refer to Fig. 2-14-B)
And also can be seen the Main Chassis hole through the
Main Cam maker hole.
Remove the Capstan Belt.
Remove the screw 1.
Remove the Capstan Holder.
Remove the 3 screws 2.
Remove the Capstan DD Unit.
Pinch Roller Cam
Capstan Belt
Marker
1
Capstan Holder
Capstan DD Unit
Main Cam
Fig. 2-14-B
2-15: LOADING GEAR S/T UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-15-A)
2
1. Remove the E-Ring 1 and remove the Main Loading
Gear.
2. Remove the Main Rod, Tension Lever, Loading Arm S
Unit and Loading Arm T Unit.
22
• Screw Torque: 4 ± 0.5kgf•cm
1
Fig. 2-13
Main Loading Gear
Main Rod
2-14: MAIN CAM/PINCH ROLLER CAM/JOINT GEAR
(Refer to Fig. 2-14-A)
Loading Arm T Unit
Tension Lever
1. Remove the E-Ring 1, then remove the Main Cam.
2. Remove the E-Ring 2, then remove the Pinch Roller
Cam and Joint Gear.
Loading Arm S Unit
1
Main Cam
Fig. 2-15-A
2
Pinch Roller Cam
Joint Gear
Fig. 2-14-A
B2-5
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
2-17: CASSETTE GUIDE POST/INCLINED BASE S/T
UNIT/P4 CAP/LED REFLECTOR
(Refer to Fig. 2-17-A)
1. When you install the Loading Arm S Unit, Loading Arm T
Unit and Main Loading Gear, align each marker. (Refer
to Fig. 2-15-B)
1. Remove the P4 Cap.
2. Unlock the support 1 and remove the Cassette Guide
Post.
3. Remove the Inclined Base S/T Unit.
4. Remove the screw 2.
5. Remove the LED Reflector.
Marker
Main Loading Gear
Marker
Cassette Guide Post
1
Inclined Base S Unit
Inclined Base T Unit
Loading Arm T Unit
Loading Arm S Unit
P4 Cap
Fig. 2-15-B
2-16: CLUTCH ASS’Y/RING SPRING/CLUTCH LEVER/
CLUTCH GEAR (Refer to Fig. 2-16-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Polyslider Washer 1.
Remove the Clutch Ass’y and Ring Spring.
Remove the Clutch Lever.
Remove the Coupling Gear, Coupling Spring and Clutch
Gear.
LED Reflector
1
2
Clutch Ass’y
NOTE
Ring Spring
Coupling Gear
Fig. 2-17-A
1. Do not touch the roller of Guide Roller.
2. In case of the P4 Cap installation, install it with parallel
for “A” and “B” of Fig. 2-17-B.
3. In case of the Cassette Guide Post installation, install
correctly as the circled section of Fig. 2-17-C.
Clutch Lever
Coupling Spring
Clutch Gear
“A”
P4 Cap
Fig. 2-16-A
“B”
Cassette Opener
NOTE
Fig. 2-17-B
1. In case of the Clutch Ass’y installation, install it with
inserting the spring of the Clutch Ass’y into the dent of the
Coupling Gear. (Refer to Fig. 2-16-B)
[OK]
Cassette Guide Post
Clutch Ass’y
[NG]
Cassette Guide Post
Coupling Gear
Fig. 2-17-C
Fig. 2-16-B
B2-6
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS
1
2
NOTE
2
1. Do not disassemble the DVD DECK PARTS except listed
parts here. Minute adjustments are needed if the
disassemble is done. If the repair is needed except listed
parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
Main Frame Ass'y
3-1: TRAY (Refer to Fig. 3-1-A)
Insulator (R)
1. Set the Tray opened. (Refer to the DISC REMOVAL
METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY)
2. Unlock the 2 supports 1 and remove the Tray.
Main Chassis Ass'y
• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.5kgf•cm
Main Frame Ass'y
Fig. 3-2-A
NOTE
1. In case of the Main Chassis Ass'y, install it from (1) to (4)
in order. (Refer to Fig. 3-2-B)
2. In case of the Main Chassis Ass'y installation, hook the
wire on the Main Frame Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-2-C.
1
Tray
1
Main Frame Ass'y (Bottom Side)
Fig. 3-1-A
(3)
Rack Loading
NOTE
(3)
1. In case of the Tray installation, install them as the circled
section of Fig. 3-1-B so that the each markers are met.
(3)
Traverse Holder
(2)
Main Frame Ass'y
(1)
Main Chassis Ass'y
(4)
(4)
Check Lock
Fig. 3-2-B
Tray
Main Frame Ass'y
Fig. 3-1-B
3-2: MAIN CHASSIS ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 3-2-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the screw 1.
Unlock the 2 supports 2.
Remove the Insulator (R) from the Main Frame Ass'y.
Remove the Main Chassis Ass'y.
Check Hook
B3-1
Fig. 3-2-C
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3-3: LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y/ LOADING BELT
(Refer to Fig. 3-3-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Pulley Gear
Remove the Loading Belt.
Remove the screw 1.
Remove the 2 screws 2.
Remove the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y.
Remove the Pulley Gear.
Main Gear
Main Frame Ass’y
Loading Belt
2
2
Rack Loading
1
Fig. 3-4-A
2
NOTE
Main Frame Ass’y
1. In case of the Rack Loading installation, do not mesh it
to the Main Gear as shown the Fig. 3-4-B.
Rack Loading
Pulley Gear
1
Check Hook
Loading Motor PCB Ass’y
• Screw Torque: 2.5 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 1)
• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)
Fig. 3-3-A
NOTE
Main Gear
1. In case of the Pulley Motor installation, check if the value
of the Fig. 3-3-B is correct.
2. When installing the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y, install it
correctly as Fig. 3-3-C.
3. In case of the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y installation, hook
the wire on the Main Frame Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-3-C.
Pulley Motor
Fig. 3-4-B
3-5: CLAMPER ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 3-5-A)
1. Press the Clamper and rotate the Clamper Plate
clockwise, then unlock the 3 supports 1.
2. Remove the Clamper Plate, Clamper Magnet and
Clamper.
Clamper Plate
7.0 ± 0.1mm
Clamper Magnet
Loading Motor
Main Frame
Safety surface for pressing
of the insert.
Fig. 3-3-B
1
The Lever should be position
between A and B.
Rack Loading
A
1
Clamper
1
Fig. 3-5-A
B
NOTE
1. In case of the Clamper Ass'y installation, install correctly
as Fig. 3-5-B.
Clamper Plate
Check Hook
Loading Motor PCB Ass’y
Fig. 3-3-C
Clamper
3-4: RACK LOADING/MAIN GEAR/PULLEY GEAR
(Refer to Fig. 3-4-A)
No gap
Fig. 3-5-B
1. Press down the catcher 1 and slide the Rack Loading.
2. Unlock the support 2 and remove the Pulley Gear.
3. Remove the Main Gear.
B3-2
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3-6: TRAVERSE HOLDER/INSULATOR (F)/INSULATOR
(R) (Refer to Fig. 3-6-A)
NOTE
1. When pushing the Rack Feed in the direction of the
arrow, it should be restored to the original position by the
spring force. (Refer to Fig. 3-7-B)
2. In case of the Motor Gear installation, check if the value
of the Fig. 3-7-C is correct.
3. When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it
correctly as Fig. 3-7-D.
4. After the assembly of the Main Chassis Ass'y, hook the
wire on the Main Chassis Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-7-E.
1. Remove the Traverse Holder.
2. Remove the 2 Insulator (F).
3. Remove the Insulator (R).
Insulator (R)
Main Chassis Ass'y
Insulator (F)
Traverse Holder
Insulator (F)
Fig. 3-6-A
Push
Rack Feed Ass'y
NOTE
Fig. 3-7-B
1. In case of the Insulator (F) installation, install correctly as
Fig. 3-6-B.
2. In case of the Insulator (R) installation, install correctly as
Fig. 3-6-C.
Motor Gear
6.0 ± 0.2mm
Insulator (F)
Feed Motor
Traverse Holder
Safety surface for pressing
of the insert.
Fig. 3-6-B
Fig. 3-7-C
Insulator (R)
Main Chassis Ass'y (Top Side)
~ FEED MOTOR ~
BLUE (4)
ORANGE (3)
Fig. 3-6-C
Switch PCB Ass'y
~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~
3-7: RACK FEED ASS'Y/SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/FEED
MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 3-7-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
BLACK (2)
RED (1)
Remove the screw 1.
Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.
Remove the screw 2.
Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.
Remove the 2 screw 3.
Remove the Feed Motor.
Remove the Motor Gear.
• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.
Fig. 3-7-D
Main Chassis Ass'y (Bottom Side)
1
Check Hook
Check Hook
2
Rack Feed Ass'y
3
Check Hook
3
Switch PCB Ass'y
Check Hook
Motor Gear
• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.
Main Chassis Ass'y
• Screw Torque: 5.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 1)
• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)
• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)
Feed Motor
Fig. 3-7-A
B3-3
Fig. 3-7-E
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3-8: FFC WIRE HANDLING
1. When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as
shown from Fig. 3-8-A to Fig. 3-8-C.
NOTE
1. Do not make the folding lines except the specified
positions for the FFC.
[ 24 pin FFC ]
Pick Up Side
Printing Surface
Fold it by 90˚
54 ± 1mm
Fold
Printing Surface
43 ± 1mm
Fig. 3-8-A
[ 6 pin FFC ]
(1)
Reinforcement Plate
(3)
Reinforcement Plate
59 ± 1mm
10 ± 1mm
Printing Surface
Printing Surface
Fold
Reinforcement Plate
Fold
(4)
Fold
Printing Surface
(2)
10 ± 1mm
Printing Surface
Fold
Printing Surface
44 ± 1mm
• Proceed the steps (1) through (4).
Fig. 3-8-B
[ 5 pin FFC ]
(1)
Reinforcement Plate
(3)
Reinforcement Plate
55 ± 1mm
10 ± 1mm
Printing Surface
Printing Surface
Fold
Reinforcement Plate
Fold
(4)
Fold
10 ± 1mm
Printing Surface
Printing Surface
(2)
• Proceed the steps (1) through (4).
Fold
Printing Surface
60 ± 1mm
Fig. 3-8-C
B3-4
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after
desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using
a tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC
desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-3.)
4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT
PACKAGE IC
REMOVAL
1. Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package
IC to protect other parts from any damage.
(Refer to Fig. 4-1.)
NOTE
Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be
careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC
leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.
NOTE
Masking is carried out on all the parts located within
10 mm distance from IC leads.
Blower type IC
desoldering machine
IC
Masking Tape
(Cotton Tape)
Tweezers
Fig. 4-1
2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering
machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-2.)
IC
Fig. 4-3
NOTE
Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC
can move back and forth easily after desoldering the
leads completely.
4. Peel off the Masking Tape.
5. Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided
Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-4.)
NOTE
Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical
direction towards the IC pattern.
Blower type IC
desoldering machine
Braided Shield Wire
Soldering Iron
IC
Fig. 4-2
IC pattern
Fig. 4-4
B4-1
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the
soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thintip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 4-8.)
INSTALLATION
1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the
new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder
each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.
(Refer to Fig. 4-5.)
IC
Thin-tip Soldering Iron
Soldering Iron
Fig. 4-8
Solder temporarily
5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the
IC using a magnifying glass.
Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering
position and installation position of the parts around the
IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.
Solder temporarily
Fig. 4-5
NOTE
When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or
repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the
bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be
damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this
case.
2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads
sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.
(Refer to Fig. 4-6.)
Soldering Iron
Solder
IC
Supply soldering
from upper position
to lower position
Fig. 4-6
3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided
Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-7.)
NOTE
Do not absorb the solder to excess.
Soldering Iron
IC
Braided Shield Wire
Fig. 4-7
B4-2
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS
A A/C
ACC
AE
AFC
AFT
AFT DET
AGC
AMP
ANT
A.PB
APC
ASS'Y
AT
AUTO
A/V
B BGP
BOT
BPF
BRAKE SOL
BUFF
B/W
C C
CASE
CAP
CARR
CH
CLK
CLOCK (SY-SE)
COMB
CONV
CPM
CTL
CYL
CYL-M
CYL SENS
D DATA (SY-CE)
dB
DC
DD Unit
DEMOD
DET
DEV
E E
EF
EMPH
ENC
ENV
EOT
EQ
EXT
F F
FBC
FE
FF
FG
FL SW
FM
FSC
FWD
G GEN
GND
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Audio/Control
Automatic Color Control
Audio Erase
Automatic Frequency Control
Automatic Fine Tuning
Automatic Fine Tuning Detect
Automatic Gain Control
Amplifier
Antenna
Audio Playback
Automatic Phase Control
Assembly
All Time
Automatic
Audio/Video
Burst Gate Pulse
Beginning of Tape
Bandpass Filter
Brake Solenoid
Buffer
Black and White
Capacitance, Collector
Cassette
Capstan
Carrier
Channel
Clock
Clock (Syscon to Servo)
Combination, Comb Filter
Converter
Capstan Motor
Control
Cylinder
Cylinder-Motor
Cylinder-Sensor
Data (Syscon to Servo)
Decibel
Direct Current
Direct Drive Motor Unit
Demodulator
Detector
Deviation
Emitter
Emitter Follower
Emphasis
Encoder
Envelope
End of Tape
Equalizer
External
Fuse
Feed Back Clamp
Full Erase
Fast Forward, Flip-flop
Frequency Generator
Front Loading Switch
Frequency Modulation
Frequency Sub Carrier
Forward
Generator
Ground
H H.P.F
H.SW
Hz
I IC
IF
IND
INV
K KIL
L L
LED
LIMIT AMP
LM, LDM
LP
L.P.F
LUMI.
M M
MAX
MINI
MIX
MM
MOD
MPX
MS SW
N NC
NR
O OSC
OPE
P PB
PB CTL
PB-C
PB-Y
PCB
P. CON
PD
PG
P-P
R R
REC
REC-C
REC-Y
REEL BRK
REEL S
REF
REG
REW
REV, RVS
RF
RMC
RY
S S. CLK
S. COM
S. DATA
SEG
SEL
SENS
SER
SI
SIF
SO
SOL
SP
C1-1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
High Pass Filter
Head Switch
Hertz
Integrated Circuit
Intermediate Frequency
Indicator
Inverter
Killer
Left
Light Emitting Diode
Limiter Amplifier
Loading Motor
Long Play
Low Pass Filter
Luminance
Motor
Maximum
Minimum
Mixer, mixing
Monostable Multivibrator
Modulator, Modulation
Multiplexer, Multiplex
Mecha State Switch
Non Connection
Noise Reduction
Oscillator
Operation
Playback
Playback Control
Playback-Chrominance
Playback-Luminance
Printed Circuit Board
Power Control
Phase Detector
Pulse Generator
Peak-to Peak
Right
Recording
Recording-Chrominance
Recording-Luminance
Reel Brake
Reel Sensor
Reference
Regulated, Regulator
Rewind
Reverse
Radio Frequency
Remote Control
Relay
Serial Clock
Sensor Common
Serial Data
Segment
Select, Selector
Sensor
Search Mode
Serial Input
Sound Intermediate Frequency
Serial Output
Solenoid
Standard Play
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS
S STB
SW
SYNC
SYNC SEP
T TR
TRAC
TRICK PB
TP
U UNREG
V V
VCO
VIF
VP
V.PB
VR
V.REC
VSF
VSR
VSS
V-SYNC
VT
X X'TAL
Y Y/C
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Serial Strobe
Switch
Synchronization
Sync Separator, Separation
Transistor
Tracking
Trick Playback
Test Point
Unregulated
Volt
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
Video Intermediate Frequency
Vertical Pulse, Voltage Display
Video Playback
Variable Resistor
Video Recording
Visual Search Fast Forward
Visual Search Rewind
Voltage Super Source
Vertical-Synchronization
Voltage Tuning
Crystal
Luminance/Chrominance
C1-2
SERVICE MODE LIST
This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.
To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit or on the main unit and on
the remote control for more than a standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)
In case of the main unit and remote control, press the remote control buttons first, then press the main unit buttons.
Set
Condition
VCR mode
Set Key
Set Key
CH UP
FWD
Standard
Time
2 sec.
Operations
PLAY/REC total hours are displayed on the TV Monitor.
Refer to the “PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS”
(CONFIRMATION OF HOURS USED).
Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.
Refer to the “WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC”.
VCR mode
CH UP
PLAY
2 sec.
Initialization of factory VCR data.
NOTE: Do not use this for normal servicing.
If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such as
the clock setting, the channel setting, and PLAY/REC total
hours.
VCR mode
(Playback)
CH UP
STOP
2 sec.
Adjust the PG SHIFTER automatically.
Refer to the “ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT”.
Power Off
CH DOWN
ON/
STANDBY
2 sec.
VCR operation mode at no connection of DVD.
Refer to the “PREPARATION FOR SERVICING”
NOTE: Although the DVD is connected, the DVD mode cannot be
selected.
Set
Condition
Set Key
Remocon
Key
Standard
Time
DVD mode
(No disc)
REC
4
2 sec.
Initialization of factory DVD data.
NOTE: Do not use this for normal servicing.
DVD mode
(Stop)
REC
6
2 sec.
DVD Write mode.
Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.
NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.
DVD mode
(Stop)
STOP
1
3 sec.
Check for the firmware version.
Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.
NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.
DVD mode
(No disc)
STOP
7
3 sec.
Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.
Refer to the “PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL”.
Operations
Method
Press the following remocon
keys continuously.
SETUP
SUBTITLE
3
AUDIO
0
Operations
Tray cannot be opened.
Refer to the “TRAY LOCK”.
Press the ATR button on the
remote control for more than
2 seconds during PLAY.
Adjusting of the Tracking to the center position.
Refer to the “MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT” (GUIDE ROLLER) and “ELECTRICAL
ADJUSTMENT” (PG SHIFTER).
Make the short circuit
between the test point of
SERVICE and the GND.
The BOT, EOT, and the Reel Sensor do not work and the VCR deck can be operated
without a cassette tape.
Refer to the “PREPARATION FOR SERVICING”
C2-1
PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS
The following standard table depends on environmental conditions and usage.
Parts replacing time does not mean the life span for individual parts.
Also, long term storage or misuse may cause transformation and aging of rubber parts.
The following list means standard hours, so the checking hours depends on the conditions.
Time
Parts Name
500
hours
1,000
hours
1,500
hours
2,000
hours
Audio Control Head
2,500
hours
Notes
Clean those parts in
contact with the tape.
Full Erase Head
(Recorder only)
Capstan Belt
Clean the rubber, and parts
which the rubber touches.
Pinch Roller
Capstan DD Unit
Loading Motor
Tension Band
T Brake Band
Clutch Ass’y
Idler Arm Ass’y
Capstan Shaft
Tape Running
Guide Post
Replace when rolling
becomes abnormal.
Cylinder Unit
Clean the Head
: Clean
: Check it and if necessary, replace it.
CONFIRMATION OF HOURS USED
PLAY/REC total hours can be checked on the screen.
Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.
NOTE: If you set factory initialization, the total hours is reset to “0”.
1. Connect the set to TV Monitor.
2. Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.
3. Press both CH UP button on the set and the FF button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
The Fig. 1 screen will appear on TV Monitor.
4. After the confirmation of using hours, turn off the power.
INIT 00 0E
PLAY/REC
0010
Fig. 1
C3-1
Initial setting content of MEMORY IC.
PLAY/REC total hours.
= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)
+ (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)
+ (16 x tens digit value)
+ (ones digit value)
PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS
CLEANING
2. TAPE RUNNING SYSTEM
NOTE
When cleaning the tape transport system, use
gauze moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
After cleaning the heads with isopropyl alcohol, do not
run a tape until the heads dry completely. If the heads
are not completely dry and alcohol gets on the tape,
damage may occur.
3. CYLINDER
Wrap a piece of chamois around your finger. Dip it in
isopropyl alcohol. Hold it to the cylinder head softly.
Turn the cylinder head counterclockwise to clean it (in
the direction of the arrow). (Refer to the figure below.)
1. AUDIO CONTROL HEAD
Clean the Audio Control Head with a cotton stick
soaked by alcohol. Clean the full erase head in the
same manner. (Refer to the figure below.)
NOTE
Do not exert force against the cylinder head. Do not move
the chamois upward or downward on the head.
Use the chamois one by one.
Audio Control Head
Cylinder Head
C3-2
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE
1. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
2. Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.
3. Open the DVD tray.
4. Press both Channel button (6) on the remote control and the REC button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
5. Press OPEN/CLOSE button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.
NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.
When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.
6. Place the Up-Date Disc and close the tray by hand. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)
7. Automatic read will start and "CD-R UPDATE PROCESS" will be displayed on the screen.
At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.
8. Approxi. 20 seconds later, the tray will open automatically. Remove the Up-Date Disc.
9. Then, Approxi. 40 seconds later, the above indication will disappear and the tray will close automatically.
When the "No Disc" appears on the screen, the write will end.
NOTE: Do not turn off the unit or push the tray by hand to close it.
Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.
10. Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.
11. After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.
Set to the DVD mode, press both Channel button (4) on the remote control and the REC button on the set for more than 2
seconds.
12. The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.
Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.
13. CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION
Set to the DVD mode, press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than
3 seconds.
Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.
No Disc
ACALA6213C
A C A L A 6 2 1 3 C
Fixed
Released times on the same date
Release date (Example: 2006.2.13)
When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.
14. Turn off the power
C4-1
A = October
B = November
C = December
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC
If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to
ensure correct data settings while making reference to TABLE 1.
INIT +0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+A
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
00
0E
32
BE
FF
64
64
4A
86
0B
26
86
32
8A
C8
0A
01
10
AF
97
95
8A
B0
6A
31
04
88
A5
9F
3A
00
10
BF
00
20
2A
11
22
70
61
2A
3A
00
0B
00
60
E5
9A
B0
00
37
30
03
17
00
84
00
00
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Table 1
1. Connect the set to TV Monitor.
2. Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.
3. Press both CH UP button on the set and the FF button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
ADDRESS and DATA will appear on TV Monitor as Fig 1.
ADDRESS DATA
INIT 00 0E
PLAY/REC
0010
Fig. 1
4. ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the SET + or - button on the remote, step through the ADDRESS
until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.
5. Press ENTER to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".
6. Again, step through the DATA using SET + or - button until required DATA value has been selected.
7. Pressing ENTER will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all data has been checked.
9. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.
After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.
10. Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.
11. Press both CH UP button on the set and the PLAY button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
12. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.
The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.
C4-2
RF SIGNAL CHECK OF DVD MT PCB
RF signal check can be done at the following A~F resistance points on the DVD MT PCB.
DVD MT PCB (BOTTOM SIDE)
B
F
C
E
D
DMF071A
C4-3
A
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS
Alignment Tape
Back tension cassette gauge
Torque cassette gauge
(KT-300NR)
Taper nut driver
ST-N5
ST-NF
70909103
70909199
70909228
VTR cleaning kit
VTR lubrication kit
Grease
JG002B Adapter
JG002E Dial Torque Gauge
(10~90gf•cm)
JG002F (60~600gf•cm)
JG022 Master Plane
JG024A Reel Disk Height
Adjustment Jig
JG153 X Value Adjustment
Screwdriver
JG154 Cable
JG176 Up-Date Disc
JG185 Tentelometer
Ref. No.
Part No.
JG002B
APJG002B00
Adapter
Parts Name
VSR Torque, Brake Torque (S Reel/T Reel Ass'y)
JG002E
APJG002E00
Dial Torque Gauge (10~90gf•cm)
Brake Torque (T Reel Ass'y)
JG002F
APJG002F00
Dial Torque Gauge (60~600gf•cm)
VSR Torque, Brake Torque (S Reel)
JG022
APJG022000
Master Plane
Reel Disk Height Adjustment
JG024A
APJG024A00
Reel Disk Height Adjustment Jig
Reel Disk Height Adjustment
JG153
APJG153000
X Value Adjustment Screwdriver
X Value Adjustment
Remarks
JG154
APJG154000
Cable
Used to connect the test point of SERVICE and GROUND
JG176
APJG176092
Up-Date Disc
Up-Date of the Firmware
JG185
APJG185000
Tentelometer
Confirmation of Tape Tension on Playback
PREPARATION FOR SERVICING
How to use the Servicing Fixture
1. While pressing the CH DOWN button on the set for more than 2 seconds, press the ON/STANDBY button on the set
simultaneously at the Power OFF. Although the DVD is connected, the DVD mode cannot be selected.
2. Short circuit between TP3001 and Ground with the cable JG154.
(The BOT, EOT, and the Reel Sensor do not work and the VCR deck can be operated without a cassette tape.)
3. In case of using a cassette tape, press the EJECT button to insert or eject a cassette tape.
Turn on the power and re-check the cable before checking the trouble points.
When you servicing with connection of DVD, perform the operations above step 2 to step 3.
D1-1
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1-2: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF TENSION
POST POSITION
1. CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Read the following NOTES before starting work.
1. Set to the PLAY mode.
2. Adjust the adjusting section for the Tension Arm position
so that the Tension Arm top is within the standard line of
Main Chassis.
3. While turning the S Reel clockwise, confirm that the edge
of the Tension Arm is located in the position described
above.
• Place an object which weighs between 450g~500g on the
Cassette Tape to keep it steady when you want to make
the tape run without the Cassette Holder. (Do not place an
object which weighs over 500g.)
1-1: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF REEL DISK
HEIGHT
1. Turn on the power and set to the STOP mode.
2. Set the master plane (JG022) and reel disk height
adjustment jig (JG024A) on the mechanism framework,
taking care not to scratch the drum, as shown in Fig. 1-1A.
3. While turning the reel and confirm the following points.
Check if the surface "A" of reel disk is lower than the
surface "B" of reel disk height adjustment jig (JG024A)
and is higher than the surface "C". If it is not passed,
place the height adjustment washers and adjust to 10(+2,
-0)mm.
4. Adjust the other reel in the same way.
Standard line of Main Chassis
Tension Arm
0.5mm (Adjusting range)
Fig. 1-2-A
Adjusting section for the
Tension Arm position
Master Plane (JG022)
Tension Band
Reel Disk Height Adjustment Jig
(JG024A)
The Tension Arm top will
move to the inside direction
of the Main Chassis.
The Tension Arm top will
move to the outside direction
of the Main Chassis.
Bend
Fig. 1-2-B
1-3: CONFIRMATION OF PLAYBACK TORQUE AND
BACK TENSION TORQUE DURING PLAYBACK
1. Load a video tape (T-120) recorded in standard speed mode.
Set the unit to the PLAY mode.
2. Install the tentelometer (JG185) as shown in Fig. 1-3. Confirm
that the meter indicates 20 ± 2gf in the beginning of playback.
Fig. 1-1-A
Reel Disk Height
Adjustment Jig
(JG024A)
Reel Disk
Master Plane (JG022)
• USING A CASSETTE TYPE TORQUE TAPE (KT-300NR)
1. After confirmation and adjustment of Tension Post
position (Refer to item 1-2), load the cassette type
torque tape (KT-300NR) and set to the PLAY mode.
2. Confirm that the right meter of the torque tape indicates
50~90gf•cm during playback in SP mode.
3. Confirm that the left meter of the torque tape indicates
25~40gf•cm during playback in SP mode.
(B)
10(+0.2, -0)mm
(C)
Tentelometer
(JG185)
(A)
Height Adjustment
Washer
2.6x4.7xT0.13
2.6X4.7xT0.25
Video Tape
Fig. 1-1-B
P1 Post
D2-1
Guide Roller
Fig. 1-3
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1-4: CONFIRMATION OF VSR TORQUE
NOTE
1. Install the Torque Gauge (JG002F) and Adapter (JG002B)
on the S Reel. Set to the Picture Search (Rewind) mode.
(Refer to Fig.1-4-B)
2. Then, confirm that it indicates 120~180gf•cm.
If the torque is out of the range, replace the following parts.
NOTE
Check item
Replacement Part
1-4
Idler Ass'y/Clutch Ass'y
1-5
Install the Torque Gauge on the reel disk firmly. Press the
REW button to turn the reel disk.
1-5: CONFIRMATION OF REEL BRAKE TORQUE
2. CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF
TAPE RUNNING MECHANISM
(S Reel Brake) (Refer to Fig. 1-4-B)
1. Once set to the Fast Forward mode then set to the Stop
mode. While, unplug the AC cord when the Pinch Roller
Block is on the position of Fig. 1-4-A.
2. Move the Idler Ass'y from the S Reel.
3. Install the Torque Gauge (JG002F) and Adapter
(JG002B) on the S Reel. Turn the Torque Gauge
(JG002F) clockwise.
4. Then, confirm that it indicates 60~100gf•cm.
Tape Running Mechanism is adjusted precisely at the
factory. Adjustment is not necessary as usual. When you
replace the parts of the tape running mechanism because of
long term usage or failure, the confirmation and adjustment
are necessary.
2-1: GUIDE ROLLER
1. Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5
MODE2).
2. Connect CH-1 of the oscilloscope to TP101 (Envelope)
and CH-2 to TP3002 (SW Pulse).
3. Trigger with SW Pulse and observe the envelope. (Refer
to Fig. 2-1-A)
4. When observing the envelope, adjust the Taper Nut Driver
slightly until the envelope will be flat.
Even if you press the Tracking Button, adjust so that
flatness is not moved so much.
5. Adjust so that the A : B ratio is better than 3 : 2 as shown
in Fig. 2-1-B, even if you press the Tracking Button to
move the envelope (The envelope waveform will begin to
decrease when you press the Tracking Button).
6. Adjust the PG shifter during playback.
(Refer to the ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS)
(T Reel Brake) (Refer to Fig. 1-4-B)
1. Once set to the Fast Forward mode then set to the Stop
mode. While, unplug the AC cord when the Pinch Roller
Block is on the position of Fig. 1-4-A.
2. Move the Idler Ass'y from the T Reel.
3. Install the Torque Gauge (JG002E) and Adapter
(JG002B) on the T reel. Turn the Torque Gauge
(JG002E) counterclockwise.
4. Then, confirm that it indicates 30~50gf•cm.
The position at FF mode.
Pinch Roller Block
Stop at this position.
Cassette
Opener
The position at
STOP mode.
S Reel side: S Reel/Tension Band/Tension
Connect/Tension Arm Ass'y
T Reel side: T Reel/T Brake Band//T Brake
Spring/T Brake Arm
NOTE
After adjustment, confirm and adjust A/C head.
(Refer to item 2-2)
Capstan DD Unit
CH-1
Envelope
(TP101)
Cassette Holder Ass'y
Fig. 1-4-A
Torque Gauge/Adapter
(JG002F/JG002B)
CH-1
Track
CH-2
Track
CH-2
SW Pulse (TP3002)
Torque Gauge/Adapter
(JG002E/JG002B)
Fig. 2-1-A
Entrance
S Reel
Max
T Reel
Fig. 1-4-B
A
Exit
B
A:B≥3:2
D2-2
Max
Fig. 2-1-B
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-2: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF AUDIO/
CONTROL HEAD
2-3: TAPE RUNNING ADJUSTMENT
(X VALUE ADJUSTMENT)
When the Tape Running Mechanism does not work well,
adjust the following items.
1. Confirm and adjust the height of the Reel Disk.
(Refer to item 1-1)
2. Confirm and adjust the position of the Tension Post.
(Refer to item 1-2)
3. Adjust the Guide Roller. (Refer to item 2-1)
4. Confirm and adjust the Audio/Control Head.
(Refer to item 2-2)
5. Connect CH-1 of the oscilloscope to TP3002 and CH-2 to
TP101.
6. Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5
MODE2).
7. Press and hold the ATR button on the remote control
more than 2 seconds to set tracking to center.
8. Set the X Value adjustment driver (JG153) to the 4 of
Fig. 2-2-B. Adjust X value so that the envelope waveform
output becomes maximum. Then, check if the 5 section
of Fig. 2-2-B is on the center position (or rather to the
cylinder side). In case of the envelope maximum at the
difference position from the center, adjust the matching of
picture and sound again.
1. Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5
MODE2).
2. Confirm that the reflected picture of stamp mark is
appeared on the tape prior to P4 Cap as shown in Fig. 22-A.
a) When the reflected picture is distorted, turn the screw
1 clockwise until the distortion is disappeared.
b) When the reflected picture is not distorted, turn the
screw 1 counterclockwise until little distortion is
appeared, then adjust the a).
3. Turn the screw 2 to set the audio level to maximum.
4. Confirm that the bottom of the Audio/ Control Head and
the bottom of the tape is shown in Fig. 2-2-C.
c) When the height is not correct, turn the screw 3 to
adjust the height. Then, adjust the 1~3 again.
Audio/Control Head
Reflected picture of
Stamp Mark
P4 Cap
Stamp Mark
Fig. 2-2-A
Audio/Control Head
5
[OK]
[NG]
1
3
2
4
Fig. 2-2-B
Audio/Control Head
Tape
0.25±0.05mm
Fig. 2-2-C
D2-3
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3. MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE
4
5
6
3
2
7
1
10
9
1. Tension Connect
2. Tension Arm
3. Guide Roller
4. Audio/Control Head
5. X value adjustment driver hole
8
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D2-4
P4 Post
T Brake Spring
T Reel
S Reel
Adjusting section for the Tension Arm position
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
Read and perform this adjustment when repairing the
circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.
1. BASIC ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink,
apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat
sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the
old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to the
IC and Transistor.)
1-1: PG SHIFTER
CONDITIONS
MODE-PLAYBACK
Input Signal-Alignment Tape
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Connect CH-1 on the oscilloscope to TP3002 and CH-2
to Video Out Jack.
2. Playback the alignment tape.
3. Press and hold the ATR button on the remote control
more than 2 seconds to set tracking to center.
4. Press both CH UP button on the set and the STOP button
on the set for more than 2 seconds.
CH-2
6.5H
CH-1
Fig. 1-1-A
CH-2
CH-1
6.5H
Fig. 1-1-B
D3-1
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)
VCR MT PCB
CP
30
01
J8007
J8006
J8001
J8002
CD102
TU301
J8008
CP102
S502
S501
AC IN
CD501
CP8001
CP103
CD103
FE HEAD
AC HEAD
TP101
CP653
TP701
TP3002
TP3001
01
CP5
CD8001
J651
J653
J652
CP651
OS651
V651
CD683
OPERATION 2PCB
OPERATION PCB
CP682
CP683
CD682
CP6602
USB PCB
CD6601
DVD DECK
CP8101
CP2303
CP2302
CD4002
CP2301
CP6601
DVD MT PCB
CD2001
CD2301
CD2302
D3-2
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(VCR SECTION)
POWER DOES NOT TURN ON
Does display light?
NO
Is the voltage
linked to L506?
NO
Check of T501
and peripheral circuit.
YES
YES
Check of V651
and peripheral circuit.
Is the voltage at
NO
Check IC3001.
pin 41 of IC3001
0V?
YES
Check of T501
and peripheral circuit.
E-1
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
THE POWER SUPPLY CUT
Inserting a cassette
and push play button.
Does the power cut
YES
Check CAPSTAN DD UNIT
and CYLINDER UNIT.
after 3 seconds?
NO
Does the power cut
YES
Check Q3006, Q3008
and CAPSTAN BELT.
after about 6 seconds?
NO
Check the POWER BLOCK.
E-2
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AT PLAYBACK AND RECORDING,
CYLINDER MOTOR UNLOAD
Is the voltage at pin 8 of
NO
Check IC502.
CP3001 about DC12.6V?
YES
In playback, is at pin 12 of
NO
Check IC3001.
CP3001 about DC2.6V?
YES
Check the DECK BLOCK.
E-3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AUDIO SHAKES
Is AUDIO HEAD
scratched?
YES
Change AUDIO HEAD.
NO
At playback, is input about
4.5Vp-p of a rectangular
NO
Change CAPSTAN DD UNIT.
wave at pin 9 of IC3001?
YES
At playback, is pin 5 of
NO
Check IC3001.
CP3001 3.5V?
YES
Check AUDIO BLOCK.
E-4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The CASSETTE TAPE
CAN NOT BE INSERTED
Does WORM GEAR of
cassette loading block
Check WORM GEAR
NO
of cassette loading block.
move?
YES
When a CASSETTE can
not inserted, is pin 25 of
NO
Check LED of DECK,
PHOTO SENSOR.
IC3001 5V ?
YES
When a CASSETTE is
inserted, is pin 8 of
CP3001 12.6V ?
YES
Change
LOADING MOTOR.
NO
Check circuit of POWER BLOCK.
E-5
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
WHEN INSERTING A CASSETTE,
IT EJECTS IMMEDIATELY
Does another CASSETTE
insert?
YES
Defective CASSETTE
or cassette loading block.
NO
Does SW3001 and
REC LEVER
NO
Correctly SW3001
and REC LEVER set.
correctly set ?
YES
After inserting
CASSETTE, is pin 35
NO
Check SW3001.
of IC3001 0V ?
YES
Check IC3001.
E-6
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
CAN NOT FF/REW
At FF/REW, does voltage
NO
Check of IC3001.
at pin 98 of IC3001
change?
YES
Check DECK MECHANISM.
E-7
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TAPE LOADING IS OK, BUT
UNLOADS IMMEDIATELY
Does CYLINDER
NO
rotate?
Is the voltage
at pin 2 of CP3001
12V ?
YES
YES
At play, is the voltage
at pin 12 of CP3001 2.6V ?
YES
Change CYLINDER unit.
NO
Is there HEAD SW
PULSE at TP3002 ?
NO
NO
Is PG PULSE signal
inputted to pin 104
of IC3001 ?
YES
YES
Change IC3001.
Check Q3006 and Q3008.
E-8
NO
Check POWER BLOCK.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AT PLAY, THE PICTURE
JITTERS VERTICAL MINUTELY
Is FG wave of CP3001
at pin 11 5V ?
NO
Change
CYLINDER MOTOR.
5V
YES
NO
Change IC3001.
Is pin 12 of CP3001 2.6V ?
YES
Change CYLINDER MOTOR.
E-9
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AUTO TRACKING
DOES NOT OPERATE
In auto tracking, is the
voltage at pin 24 of IC3001
more than DC 0.2V?
YES
NO
Does the CTL pulse
signal (more than 0.6Vp-p)
appear at pin 7 of IC3001?
more than 0.6Vp-p
YES
Change IC3001.
E-10
NO
Check CONTROL HEAD.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
WHEN PLAYBACK, FF OR REW
MODE IS ACTIVE, UNIT STOPS
IMMEDIATELY
Does CAPSTAN DD
MOTOR rotate?
Refer to section "CAPSTAN
DD MOTOR NOT
NO
ROTAING".
YES
Is there REEL SENSOR
PULSE signal at pins 38 and
NO
Check Q3001 and Q3002.
39 of IC3001?
YES
Change IC3001.
E-11
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AT PLAY, PICTURE JITTERS
HORIZONTALLY
NO
Does a noise on the picture
appear?
YES
By adjusting the MANUAL
TRACKING UP/DOWN
BUTTONS, will the line
NO
Check P/B ENVELOPE.
disappear?
YES
Is a height of GUIDE POST
NO
The height of GUIDE POST
readjust.
maximum?
YES
Is PG SHIFTER
adjustment 6.5H?
NO
Adjust PG SHIFTER.
YES
Is a wave of PB-Y unusual?
Change IC101
and peripheral circuit.
NO
YES
Change IC101.
E-12
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AT PLAYBACK, THE PICTUER
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does E-E picture
NO
appear?
Is the voltage at pins 23,
44, 45, 68, 52 and 77 of
Check POWER BLOCK.
IC101 5V?
YES
Is there video signal
NO
YES
NO
Change IC101.
at pin 26 of IC101?
YES
Is there video signal
NO
Change IC8005.
at pin 2 of IC8005?
YES
Is there video signal
at pin 19 of IC3001?
NO
Change IC3001.
YES
Check J8001.
E-13
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AT PLAYBACK, THE COLER DOES
NOT APPEAR
Is there color signal in
video signal at pin 26 of
NO
Is there video signal at pin
26 of IC101?
IC101?
YES
YES
Change IC101.
E-14
NO
Change X'tal.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
PLAYBACK PICTURE IS NOISY
(EVEN AFTER CLEANING HEADS)
Is noisy a wave of video
signal at pin 26 of IC101?
NO
Check CYLINDER.
YES
Is noisy a wave of video signal
of EMITTER of Q8004?
YES
Check Q8004.
NO
Check J8001.
E-15
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO COLOR DURING SELF
RECORDING AND PLAYBACK
Is there CHROMA signal
at pins 30 and 32 of
NO
Check TU301, IC8002, J653
and circuit around it.
IC101?
YES
Is there CHROMA signal at
pin 26 of IC101?
NO
Change IC101.
YES
Check IC8005 and circuit around of
J8001.
E-16
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AT PLAY, AUDIO DOES NOT
APPEAR
At E-E, does audio appear?
Refer to section "E-E DOES
NO
NOT APPEAR".
YES
Is the voltage at pins 6, 8
and 9 of IC101 about
NO
Check A/C HEAD.
2.5V?
YES
Is there audio signal at pin
10 of IC101?
NO
Check circuit around at pin
10 of IC101.
YES
Is there audio signal at
pins 78 and 80 of IC101?
YES
Check circuit around at pins
78 and 80 of IC101.
NO
Check whether there are not a
damage, dirt in AUDIO HEAD.
E-17
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
CAPSTAN DD MOTOR NOT
ROTATING
In playback, is there voltage
at pin 2 of CP3001 12V?
NO
Check POWER BLOCK.
YES
In playback, is there voltage
NO
Change IC3001.
at pin 102 of IC3001 2.5V?
YES
DD MOTOR rotate now?
If not, replace it.
E-18
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
THE AUDIO CAN NOT
RECORD
Is bias level at L102 OK?
NO
In starting recording,
is there sine wave at
pin 96 of IC3001?
NO
Check IC3001.
YES
YES
Check disconnection
and short of L102.
Check IC701 and
Is there audio signal at
pin 80 of IC101?
NO
the circuit from TUNER
or audio input jack to IC701 .
YES
Is there voltage
of base of Q103
NO
Change Q103.
about 5V?
YES
Is there a sine wave
at pin 5 of L101?
NO
Change L101.
YES
Check lead wire of A/C HEAD
and CONNECTOR.
E-19
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
THE CASSETTE INSERT, BUT
THE TAPE DOES NOT MOVE
Does the mode
appear at display?
Check LOADING MOTOR and
NO
MODE SENSOR
RELATION DEPARTMENT.
YES
Does operate with
remote control?
NO
Check IC3001.
YES
Check operation PCB.
E-20
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
RECORDING MECHANISM WORKS,
BUT NO VIDEO RECORD FROM
INPUT JACK OR TUNER
Is there video signal at
Check circuit of video signal
from VIDEO IN or
NO
pins 30 and 32 of IC
101?
TUNER to IC101.
YES
Is the BASE of
NO
of IC3001 5V?
Q103 5V?
NO
Change IC3001.
YES
YES
Is there video signal
Is the voltage at pin 96
NO
Change IC101.
at pin 26 of IC101?
YES
Check CYLINDER UNIT and
circuit around of CP101.
E-21
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
E-E DOES NOT APPEAR
(THE PICTURE DOES NOT
APPEAR FROM TUNER)
Does normality AUDIO JACK
NO
Connection is done over again.
CONNECT?
YES
Are there the voltage
of +B(5V) and TU(32V)
NO
Check POWER BLOCK.
of TU301?
YES
Check the picture.
Is there video signal at
NO
Change TU301.
pin 17 of TU301?
YES
Is there video signal
at pin 26 of IC101?
NO
Change IC101.
YES
Is there video signal at
pin 19 of IC3001?
NO
Change IC3001.
YES
Check J8001.
E-22
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
E-E AUDIO (MONO)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does E-E AUDIO
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
NO
(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
(STEREO) appear?
YES
Is the voltage at pin 95
YES
Change IC3001.
of IC3001 5V?
NO
Is there audio signal at
pins 9 and 71 or pins 7
NO
Check J651 and J652 or
J8002.
and 69 of IC701?
YES
Is there audio signal at
NO
Change IC701.
pin 6 of IC701?
YES
Check circuit around of J8001.
E-23
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
E-E AUDIO (STEREO)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Is the voltage at pins 5,
NO
Check POWER BLOCK.
15 and 32 of IC701 5V?
YES
Is the voltage at pins
3 and 54 of IC701 9V?
NO
Check POWER BLOCK.
YES
Is there Audio signal at
NO
Check J651, J652 and J8002.
pins 7, 9, 61 and 71 of
IC701?
YES
Is there Audio signal at
NO
Change IC701.
pins 78 and 80 of IC701.
YES
Check circuit around of J8001.
E-24
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TUNER AUDIO (MONO)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does E-E AUDIO
NO
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
(MONO) appear?
YES
Is there signal at pin
57 of IC701?
Check circuit around of TU301
NO
at pin 14.
YES
Is there audio signal at
pin 78 and 80 of IC701?
NO
Change IC701.
YES
Is there audio signal
a collector of Q8005
and Q8006?
NO
Check IC701.
YES
Check circuit around of J8001.
E-25
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TUNER AUDIO (STEREO)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does TUNER AUDIO
Refer to section "TUNER AUDIO
NO
(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
(MONO) appear?
YES
Does E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) appear?
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
NO
YES
At the time of channel change,
does the display of a stereo
come out to the screen?
NO
Change IC701.
YES
Is there audio signal at
Check circuit around
NO
of TU301 at pin 14.
pin 57 of IC701?
YES
Is there audio signal at
pin 78 and 80 of IC701?
NO
Change IC701.
YES
Is there audio signal
a emitter of
Q8005 and Q8006?
NO
Check IC701.
YES
Check circuit around of J8001.
E-26
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
PB AUDIO (Hi-Fi)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does E-E AUDIO
NO
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) appear?
(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
YES
Does NORMAL PB
AUDIO appear?
Refer to section "AT PLAY,
NO
AUDIO DOES NOT APPEAR".
YES
Is there audio signal at
NO
Check circuit of HEAD AMP
and CYLINDER UNIT.
pins 24 and 27 of IC701?
YES
Is there audio signal at
NO
Change IC701.
pins 78 and 80 of IC701?
YES
Check circuit around of J8001.
E-27
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Hi-Fi AUDIO
CAN NOT RECORD
Does E-E AUDIO appear?
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
NO
(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
YES
AT state of video recording,
is there audio signal at
Check circuit around of J651,
NO
J652, J8002 and TU301.
pins 7, 9, 69 and 71 of IC701?
YES
Is there audio signal at
pins 78 and 80 of
NO
Change IC701.
IC701?
YES
At recording and play, is
NO
Check CYLINDER UNIT.
there signal at pins 7, 8
and 9 of CP101?
YES
Check IC701.
E-28
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(DVD SECTION)
DECK DOES NOT ACCEPT
OPEN/CLOSE
NO
Is the voltage at pin 3, 18 and
19 of IC2301 about DC6V ?
Check P.CON +6V line of
POWER BLOCK.
YES
Is the lose connection
YES
Check CP2302 connection
to DECK.
at CD2302 to DECK ?
NO
Check loader block.
NO PLAYBACK PICTURE OF AV
JACK
Is there voltage
No
Check IC4001 and peripheral
(beam current) at
JG017 and JG019 ?
circuit.
Yes
Is there signal at pins
196, 198, 201, 203, 206
and 208 of IC4001?
No
Check LOADER BLOCK.
Yes
Is there VIDEO signal at Yes
pins 183, 184, 186, 187
and 189 of IC4001 ?
Check J8007 and peripheral
circuit.
No
Change IC4001.
E-29
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO PLAYBACK PICTURE OF
S-VIDEO JACK
Is there Y signal at
YES
Check J8008 and
peripheral circuit.
pin 184 of IC4001 ?
NO
Change IC4001.
NO COLOR PLAYBACK PICTURE
OF S-VIDEO JACK
Is there C signal at
pin 183 of IC4001 ?
YES
Check J8008 and
peripheral circuit.
NO
Is there Y signal at
pin 184 of IC4001?
REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK
PICTURE OF S-VIDEO JACK".
NO
YES
Is there VIDEO signal
YES
REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK
PICTURE OF AV JACK" .
at pin 186 of IC4001?
NO
Is the voltage at pins 34, NO
80, 109, 147, 158 and 218
of IC4001 about 1.8V?
Check P.CON+3.3V line on
POWER BLOCK.
YES
Change IC4001.
E-30
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO AUDIO ON PLAYBACK
YES
Is there AUDIO signal at
pins 7 and 8 of IC8102 ?
Check IC8102 and
peripheral circuit.
NO
Change IC4001.
NO DIGITAL AUDIO ON
PLAYBACK OF COAXIAL JACK
Check connection at RCA
Cable.
Is there waveform at pin 5 Yes
of J8006 about 1Vp-p?
No
Is there waveform at
pin 126 of IC4001
about 3Vp-p ?
Yes
Check Q8001 and peripheral
circuit.
No
Change IC4001.
E-31
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO ANALOG AUDIO ON
PLAYBACK
Is there AUDIO signal at
pins 1 and 7 of IC8001 ?
Yes
Check J8006 and peripheral
circuit.
No
Is there waveform at pins Yes
Is there voltage at pin
1, 2, 3 and 16 of IC8102 ?
6 of IC8102 about 5V ?
No
Yes
Change IC4001.
Change IC8102.
E-32
No
Check AT+5V.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO HDMI ON PLAYBACK
Is there voltage at pins 161,
No
178 of IC4001 about 1.8V
and at pins 166 and 172
Check 1.8V and 3.3V line of
IC4001 and peripheral circuit.
about 3.3V ?
Yes
Is there voltage at pins
18 and 19 of CP5901?
(Connects with monitor)
No
Check P.CON 5V line and
peripheral circuit.
Yes
Is there waveform
Q5904 (SCL) and
Q5905 (SDA) ?
No
Check IC4001 and peripheral
circuit.
Yes
Change IC4001.
E-33
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO USB ON PLAYBACK
Is there voltage at pin 65
No
Check P.CON 3.3V line of
IC4001 and peripheral circuit.
of IC4001 about 3.3V ?
Yes
Is there voltage at pins 4
No
Change IC6601.
and 5 of IC6601 5V.
Yes
Is there voltage at pins 4 No
and 5 of CP6602 ?
Change CD6601.
Yes
Is there waveform
at pins 2 and 3 of
CP6602 ?
No
Check IC4001 and peripheral
circuit.
Yes
Change IC4001.
E-34
DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM
DVD LOADER
DM-S/3O
A
B
+3.3VREG
IC4003
BA00BC0WFP-E2
A
C
+1.8VREG
IC4004
BA00BC0WFP-E2
X4001
E
DVD/CDPD
VCR BLOCK
B, C
RF, A, B, C, D, E, F
RX
OPU
TX
DVD/CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD, VREF(VC), VR/DVD, VR/CD
SPINDLE/
STEPING/
SLED
MOTOR
TR+/-, FO+/-,
MOT_LD+/-,
MOT_SLED+/-,
MOT_SPDL+/-
Motor Drive
IC2301
LA6565VR-TLM-E
DVD-H, P-H/I-L
SPINDLE/SLED/
FOCUS/TRACK_PWM,
TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN, DRVSB
F
DAC_A~E_VIDEO
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP/HDMI
IC4001
ZR36888HLCG
(Vaddis8)
SPDIF
DVD RESET
HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW
ZERO
HDMI BLOCK
I/TMDS_D2+/-,
I/TMDS_D1+/-,
I/TMDS_D0+/-,
I/TMDS_CLK+/-,
I2CCLK, I2CDAT
ML, MC, MD,
AMCLK, ABCLK,
ASDATA0
HDMI_DET
HDMI CONNECTOR
CP5901
DVD-H
UBS Current Limitation
IC6601
RT9702-PB
G
USB_DN
HA0~A20,
HD0~D15,
MEMCS0, MEMCS1,
RD, WR
16Mbit Flash
IC4007
SST39VF1601-70-4CEKE
CP6601
USB_DP
USB_DN,
USB_DP,
5V
USB CONNECTOR
CP6603
F-1
AUDIO L
AUDIO R
USB BLOCK
5V
D
2ch Audio DAC
IC8102
PCM1753DBQR
B
D
SD_D0~D15
64Mbit SDRAM
IC4005
M12L64164A-7TG
B
SD_A0~A11,
RAMCS0/RAMCS1/RAMRAS/RAMCAS/
RAMWE/SD_BA0, RAMCLK, RAMDQM
A--- AT+3.8V
B--- +3.3V
C--- +1.8V
D--- +5V
E--- +A5V
F--- +6V
G--- AT+5.2V
F-2
VCR BLOCK DIAGRAM
SPDIF
A, H
TU_V_OUT
TUNER
TU301
O
OS8001
OPTICAL
Y
YUV OUT
J8007
Y(G)_OUT
DVD BLOCK
U(PB)_OUT
U
V(PR)_OUT
C_OUT
V
C
Y
S-VIDEO OUT
J8008
DVD_A
OPE AMP
IC8001
RC4580IDR
D
DVD_V_OUT
DVD_A_OUT
REAR IN JACK
J8002
V
L
REAR_V_IN
L
C
R
IC8002
MM1501XNRE
A
C
R
Y/C_VIDEO OUT
Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/
HEAD AMP
IC101
LA71206M-MPB-E
VCR/DVD VIDEO SW
IC8005
MM1501XNRE
DVD AUDIO OUT JACK
J8006
COAXIAL
C
SW V_OUT
FRONT AV JACK
J653
V
J652
J651
R
SYSCON/TIMER/SERVO
IC3001
OEC0157B
NORMAL A_ON/OUT
L
VIDEO_OUT
REAR_A_IN
SIF_OUT
FRONT_A_IN
RF_CONV_A_OUT
B, F
HIFI/DEMODULATOR
IC701
LA72670BM-L-MPB-E
HiFi_AUDIO_OUT
A, C, E
V
REAR OUT JACK
J8001
L
R
A ...P.CON+5V
B ...P.CON+5V (MICON)
C ...P.CON+9V
D ...P.CON+12V
E ...AT+5.2V
F ...AT+5V (MICON)
G ...AT+12.6V
H ...+32V
F-3
F-4
G-1
W824
R8101
W833
C4080
C4015
C4038
R4039
W837
R4038
D4005
R4051
C4052
C4077
C4020
R4036
R4037
C4082
C4074
B4005
C4072
B4006
B2304
C2342
B2303
R4404
R4402
R4072
B4012
C4056
R6603
C2347
C2305
C6602
R6613
B6601
R2338
R2313
R2327
R6605
R2351
R2356
R6606
R2350
R2353
R2352
R2359
C6609 C6610
R2346
R2348
R2347
C2348
C2301
C2306
C2317
C2332
C6604
D2304
R2357
C4111
C4012
C4044
C4107
C4014
C4017 C4016
C4033
C4088
C4117
R4061
R2329
W810
R2323
Q2305 Q2303
C4036
C4065
C8105
B4019
C4002
C4116
R2349
C2307
B6602
C2357
C2359
C2360
C2358
W809
R2321
R2326
R2342
CP2301
C8104
C8108
C4099
B4004
R4021
C4010
R4020
C4008
R4019
C4109 B4022
C4019
C4023
C4013
C4018
R4002
R4022 R4043
C8107
C4029
R4003
R4001
C4022 B4017
B4011
C2304
R2309
C2337 D2303
C2365
C4075
B4003
C4114
R2302
C8122
X4001
C4120
C4003
C4085
C4004
B4009
C4001
C4087
C4076
W865 B4016
C5902 B5901
R5910
R5909
C4071_1
R2358
R4059
R4004
R4005
R4086
C4025
C4081
R4024
R4407
B4021 B4020
R5904
C4101
CP6603
C4046
C4045
B4002
C4007
C4027
C4122
R4408
C4103
C4031 B4001 C4024
C4030 C4119
C4028
R4070
C8111
C8120
B4015
R4012
C8110
129
C4035
L5901
C8115
D8112
193
C8124
D8111
IC4007
Q5905 Q5904
C8102
D5902
L5902
D5903
C5901
Q5901
Q5903 D5901
R5906
R5905
C8101
L5904
C4034
L5903
CP5901
Q5902
C8121
R4062
R5902
R5903
R5908
R2308
R2301
R2307
R2305
R2310
DEF091A
B8103
C4041 C4040
C8119
IC4005
R5901
R4025
C4098
R4042
W836
IC2301
L8101
R4053
R4054
C4069
R5907
R4027
R4026
65
C4070_1
R2328
R2325
C2313
C2341_1
R2333
CP2303
IC8102
1
R4058
R2335
L8105
R2354
C4086
R2336
R4071 B4010
C4050
R4052
R8113
C8125
R8112 C8114
C8126
C8113
C2303
R2304
R2306
R2318
R2332
B2302
C2340_1
C2302
R2303
R2337
R2330
R2324
R2319
R2334
C2316_1
C2310_1
C2314_1
R2339
L8104
C4047
R4008
R4063
R4060
C4057
B4013
C4068_1
B2301
C2309
R2340
R2341
R2320
C8127 C8103
B4008
R4048
C4021
C4032
C4096
R4078 D4004
D4003
D4002
R4406
C2315
R2360
C2329_1
CP2302
W815 W831
L8103
C4067_1
C4051
C2328_1
DVD MT/USB (TOP SIDE)
W834
W826
C8112
W820
W830
W850
C8109 C8106
C4064
W838
C4039 R4040 R4044
R4016
R4045
C2343_1
C6605
Q2301
C4102
R4010
R4018
C4062
W854
C4083
C2346_1
R6615
R6614
C6606
CP6601
Q2302
L8102
C4078
C4063
IC4004
C4108
C4026
R4067
W817
W807 C4091
DMF071A
B4007
C4095
C4011_1
R4047
R4032
R4009
R4081
IC6601
C4100
C4110_1
C4053_1
W804
C6603
C2331
W819 W818
C4066
C4097
C4084_1
R4080
IC4003
C4089
C4090
L4001
R4066
R2355
IC4001
C4009_1
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
DVD MT (BOTTOM SIDE)
DEF091A
CP6602
Q2304
D6601
DMF071A
CP8101_1
CD4002
G-2
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
VCR MT/OPERATION/OPERATION2 (INSERTED PARTS)
SOLDER SIDE
DEE079A
SW699
SW687
SW690
CP683
SW689
R700
R698
W041
CP651_1
W109
W110
R553
W012
35
HS502
R5
W239
D508
_1
15
W011
D529
R513
D519
D522
01_1
W877
CP5
W856
C516
RISK
D501
C513
D502
D505
AS MARKED .
R505
R506
D506
D503
C
52
6
- REPLACE
R516
C525
Q501
HS501
R508
R529
W017
D509
R504 D504
W013
OF FIRE
C509
D518
R549
R530
FH502
CP 8
W022
J8006
OS8001
C8022
J8007
S801Y
R8028
S502
C8015_1
C8005
C8048
L8001
J8008
W164
R706
R8029
C8043
R8036
C8047_1
R8033
L8002
R501
C8024
W018
W019
L8007
S501
CD501
W021
W020
C8032
W820
L501
C502_1
R8047
01
FH501
C8063_1
R503
W023
W880
1
J8001
001_
C8035
W091
J8002
D8005
W093
C8037
W092
W095
C104
C115
C511_1
F5
R8004
D8004
Q8004
C105
W163
Q3008
C8003_1
W819 CP102_1
C755_1
D8006
W168
02
W014
C8034
R8059
W094
C751
CP101
W906
C3029
W165
R723
L301
W097
C8038
S802X
W167
S802Y
R105
C763
C119_1
R8011
W166
W206
R719
L101
R109
C740_1
W207
C758
15
R5
C8051
C8036
W098
W172
W169
C5
C8062_1
W077
W170
TU301
C767
W208
C540_1
R512
W881
C8004_1
W171
C123
L8009
W145
W852
C101
C765
C8075_1
R8053
C174
S801X
W081
W078
Q104
W016
W084
R8009
L705
C163
L703
W238
W063
C110
C731
W052
W879
L102
W146
R140
C112
D510
W085
01
R144
C512
C8013
W083
W082
W080
W079
C131
D524
Q502
Q507
IC501
W847
W089
C3033
30
C138
C136
C722
W062
W147
B501
R533
W829
W822
CP
W151
Q105
W826
W090
W152
W150
W149
W153
W148
W204
L107
W229
Q3004
W836
X101
W230
C315_1
X3001
C135
C721_1
C318_1
D3009
W139
R137
W835
C142
D514
W842
W064
W060
W157
W156
W243
D8001
W155
C719
W231
C309
W116
W121
W118
W185
R3016
W195
W202
W199
W200
W201
L104_1
R123
C713
C759
G-3
W184
W186
L8008
W850
C152
R534
W068
W061
W162
W160
W158
W159
W815
R710
C720_1
W237
W119
W123
W125
W120
W124
W189
W190
W194
W161
D512
W066
D3002
T501
Q510
W067
L103
W128
W126
W127
W232
R704
W133
W131
W130
W801
C102
R702
R703
W135
W073
W242
W069
D511
W845
IC503
C3016
W071
W070
C504
C505
C3032
D3007
W065
L3003
D527
C518
D507
W816
L505
W074
W072
W138
W804
C501
W004
W076
W075
R3012
C506
W885
W044
C3013
C3052
W134
W192
W005
W046
W042
W136
C753
C716
W047
C522
D656
C531
W008
W007
W045
W205
C728
W886
W846
W833
W050
W049
W048
W141
W140
W817
W235
W051
W867
C3045
W142
W193
C727
C712
R712
R724
C742
C750_1
W236
W821
W117
W114
W144
W143
D3001
W806
W054
5
00
Q3
W137
C756
C725
CP103
W196
C726
R718
R728
C735
W837
C3021_1
W132
R729
W220
L704
L701
W221
W197
W198
W225
Q3006
L702
W223
W222
W055
W053
W838
W203
C8031
W224
C313_1
C3000
W227
W226
Q3002
C519
R509
W058
W057
L506
C521
IC502
W807
W056
W113
C8010_1
TP101
W122
W043
C8040_1
TP701
R3050
W099
C653
W827
Q503
C514
Q505
R527
Q504
W025
W024
C8042
W228
W028
W026
W101
W187
W188
W214
L8004
TP3002
W216
W215
TP3001
W191
W246
W245
CP653
W217
W218
W219
Q3001
W841
W834
C600
W027
W103
W100
W173
C535
R554
R3019
R517
W002
W001
W241
W104
W102
C656
W032
W031
W174
W832
W034
W105
D516
W003
R514
W108
R3002
R3028
W179
W210
W211
W212
W213
W037
W036
W033
R3011
D533
D526
W840
C3023
D523
R651
W839
W178
W175
R3015
DME063A
C652
W112
W111
SW3001
W182
W183
D686
V651
SW653
SW654
SW655
D685
R691
OS651
J651
J652
J653
R692
CP682
SW686
R693
R697
SW691
R695
R689
R686
R699
SW697
DEE080A
SW685
D5
DEE081A
G-4
G-5
DME063A
DEE080A
Q661
Q657 Q656
R673
R672 R667 R666
1
Q662
Q663
Q658
Q655
85
Q653
C8059
R664
R3037
IC3099_1
Q3007
C3005
R3001
R3014
C732
Q107
R141
R132
C705
C717
C718
Q109
R716
R306
Q652
C730
C307
C308
C724
C733
C708
R708
C302
C317
C165
C108
R8015
R8014
R8001
C771
C741
C748
C702 C744
R722 R720
R714
R721
C749
C752
C760
C768
R727
R731
R725 C762
C764 C766
C704
R726
C169
C166
1
C303
61
R717
C701
C723
C709
R8022R8008
R8012
R8007
C8028
C116
C109
C129
R142
C162
21
C711 R713
C706
R707
C703
R711 R715
C710
C739
C747
C158
C154
41
C707
C757
C754
C156
R129
C147
IC
10
1
41
C714
R701
C715
C743
R127
C160 C141
R126
C139
C140
R8005
R8006
C8025
C106
R107
R113
C120
C125 R116 R114
R119 C127 R117 C122
C126
R115
C121 R111
C118 C117
R112
C124
R106
C132
C114
61
C746
R122
C143
C133
R108
C107
R103
R102
21
C161
C151 R133
C146
C145
R131
R3031
C148
C144
C137
C134
R124
R136
C8057
R138
R139
R3032
C3004 C3007
R3035
C3041 R3056
C3020 C3008
Q102
C3066
Q651
C3035
57
Q103
1
R3036
Q659
C3018
R3027
C3027
C3019
C3015 R3020 R3007
R3017 C3010
R3003
R101
R110
R3009
Q654
R3021
Q101
C3030
R3038
Q8005
R676
Q665
29
Q8006 R8016
C654
Q513 Q514
R8048
R8021
R677
R678
R3010
C3024 C3009
R3062 C3025 C3053
R3057
C3050 R3033
R3049
R3043
C3001
Q509
C3002
R3047
R3008
R3044
R3087
R3034
R3030
IC
30
01
C3014
R8051
R663
R662
C3038
R3063
C3031
R521
R3022
Q8007
R674
Q8003
R3025
C3044
C3040
R8034
R3053
C3065 C3034C3049
R8049
C3017
IC8001
R3083 R3026
R8052
R8017
C655
R3046
Q8008
R8030
C8045
C8065 R8038
R8045 R8041 C8064 R8055
R8050
Q8002
C8014
Q8012
R8031
R8013
R8026 R8024
R8010
R670
Q666
R8042
C8050
C8023
R8025 Q8009
C8056
R8057
C8049
R8035
R8039
C8044
R8046
R8023
Q8011
C3061
C3036
R3004
R8027
C8009
C8033
C8008
R8003
Q8010
R671
R669 R661
C3022
C3006
R522
C524
R520
Q8001
C8055
R8002
R8054
B8001
C8021
C8054
Q8020
R519
R518
C510
C8058
C8046
R8037
Q8022
R668
R675
R3055
R531
R547
C508
R507
R301
R304
Q8021
Q8019
R665
Q506
R683
R532
C527
R524
R552
R511
C534
R523
C520
R536
R515
C8060
R8040
1
70
IC
C544
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
VCR MT (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)
SOLDER SIDE
W800
W808
R302
IC8005
IC8002
IC3003
R3051
R3006
Q664
Q3003
Q660
R3045
DEE081A
DEE079A
G-6
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
LOADING MOTOR (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)
SOLDER SIDE
SOLDER SIDE
SW1
LOADING MOTOR (INSERTED PARTS)
CD2302
SW
SOLDER SIDE
SW2
D D0 0
CD2301
M2601
G-7
OR
BLUE
BL
RE
M2602
G-8
A
B
P.CON+3.3V
C4091
100P CH
F
C4108
(A_GND)
0.1
F
YK
C4101
10V 100
C4087
0.1 F
C4122
0.1 B
R4012
1M
D
47 KA
C4036 0.1 B
C4084_1
RX
W807
CD4002 (CP501_1)
CH2D1101
1
AT+5.2V
TP4015
TP4011
L4001
W834
6
TP4021
C4066
1
TP4022
GND(M)
7
P.CON+6V
8
P.CON+A5V
9
UNREG+3.8V 10
B
UNREG+3.8V 11
TP4027
TP4028
GND(A)
12
SPDIF
13
3
EN
VCC
1
2
GND
VO
ADJ
6
4
5
R4009
10V100 KA
5.6K
+-1%
P.CON+3.3V
1K+-1%
2
R4047
330 +-1%
R4067
16V 47 KA
C4110_1
F
C4111
0.1
+-1%
R4081
UNREG+3.8V
+-1%
10P CH
C4090
10K
10V 100 KA
REG+1.8V IC
IC4004
BA00BC0WFP
R4066
R4032
DVD-H
UNREG+3.8V
10V 100 KA
5
C4100
4
C4089
6
0.01 B
2
1.5K
C4098
5
RDY(I/O(0))/RX
W850
TP4020
C4080
1
R4080
B
ABCLK
ALRCLK
C4114
ADJ
3.9K
C4083
VO
F
2.2
MMZ1608R102CT
B4006
GND
0.1
B4019
VCC
AMCLK
220
220
4.7K C4119
4
SSCCLK/TX
TP4013
P.CON+5V 2.2uH 0305
SPDIF
EN
C4015
R4026
R4027
R4407
220
3
GND(D)
AT+5.2V
JG4031
R4025
0.001 B
REG+3.3V IC
IC4003
BA00BC0WFP
SYS_MUTE
HOME
16V 47 KA
0.1 F
JG4030
2
GND(D)
W830
VCC+6V
P.CON+A5V
AT+5.2V
TP4012
4
PCB130
DMF071
ASDATA0
SPDIF
SD_D1
SD_D15
SD_D0
SD_D13
SD_D2
SD_D14
SD_D3
6.3V
W804
FROM/TO POWER
DVD/VR 130mm
DVD COMBO 250mm
0.01 B
C4107
MMZ1608
R102CT
B4020
6.3V 100 KA
4.7K
R4045
R4002 75 +-1%
R4003 75 +-1%
R4004 75 +-1%
R4005 75 +-1%
R4086 75 +-1%
JG4025
JG4026
JG4027
JG4028
C4029 0.1 F
C4103
JG4029
R4058
B4010
MMZ1608R102CT
JG4016
JG4017
R4024
150
4.7K
C4025
R4071
0.1 F
JG4014
JG4032
B
1
C4024
SD_D12
SD_D4
SD_D10
SD_D5
SD_D11
SD_D7
SD_D9
SD_D6
SD_D8
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
C4097 0.01 B
6.3V 47 KA
C4072
0.1
0.1 F
6.3V 220 YK
C4070_1
0.1 F
C4067_1
C4075
6.3V 47 KA
C4071_1
C4086 0.001 B
C4085 0.001 B
RFINN
RFINP
10K
+-1%
R4022
VDDC
GNDADC
GNDAFER
DVDLD
CDLD
DVDMD
CDMD
RESLOAD
BGCAP
OPUREF
ADCIN[F]
ADCIN[K]
ADCIN[E]
GNDADC
ADCIN[J]
ADCIN[D]
ADCIN[H]
ADCIN[C]
VDDAFE
VDDSAFE
ADCIN[B]
VDDAFE
0.1 F
C4023
MMZ1608R102CT
DUPRD1
2
RAMCLK
RAMWE#
RAMDQM
RAMCS1#
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#
SD_A9
SD_A10
SD_A8
SD_A11
RAMCS0#
SD_BA0
C
RX
DUPTD1
RF
OPU_A
JG4015
JG4013
0.1 F
+-1%
R4043
10K
C4004
100P CH
1 B
C4116
C4088
JG4012
JG4011
VDDP
ICGPCI/O[5]
ICGPCI/O[4]
GNDC
B4017
C4120
0.1 F
C4020
0.001
B
R4059
100
(W803)
R4008
100
C4022
0.1 F
1
C4019
B
0.1 F
C4018
SD_A1
SD_A7
SD_A0
SD_A4
SD_A3
SD_A5
SD_A2
SD_A6
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
H-1
OPU_B
OPU_C
SPDL_SENSOPU_D
VC
OPU_F
SPDL_SENS+
OPU_E
DVD_LD
CD_LD
(VR_DVD) DVD/CDPD
(VR_CD) DVD/CDPD
(DVD-L/CD-H)
DVD/CD
HDMI_DET
C4068_1
6.3V 100 KA
B4013
C4057
180P CH MMZ1608R102CT
0.1 F
JG4009
JG4010
D1_2
TP4010
GPCI/O[50]
GPCI/O[49]
GPCI/O[48]
IDGPCI/O[5]
GPCI/O[34]
GPCI/O[33]
GPCI/O[42]
VDDP
GPCI/O[40]
F
C4109
USB_DP
USB_DN
BOOT1
BOOT2
P.CON+3.3V
3
1
RESET
100
MMZ1608R102CT
0.1
6.3V 100 KA
1K
C4078
1K
R4054
15P CH
C4035
TP4014
MMZ1608R102CT
R4053
R4016
C4027 0.1 F
JG4019
JG4020
JG4021
JG4022
JG4023
JG4024
C4030 1 B
8P CH
1
C4053_1
B4004
C4034
X4001
100BT02701
27MHz
5
I2CDAT
I2CCLK
HDMI_DET
I/TMDS_D2+
I/TMDS_D2I/TMDS_D1+
I/TMDS_D1I/TMDS_D0+
I/TMDS_D0I/TMDS_CLK+
I/TMDS_CLKUSB_DP
USB_DN
AT+5.2V
VCC+6V
I/TMDS_CLK+
I/TMDS_CLK-
W836
R4042
100
0.1 F
C4028
6
FROM/TO HDMI/USB
I/TMDS_D0+
I/TMDS_D0-
6.3V 100 KA
NC
MMZ1608R102CT
C4009_1
TP4003
TP4007
B4021
F
I2CDAT
I2CCLK
I/TMDS_D2+
I/TMDS_D2HDVCC+3.3V
I/TMDS_D1+
I/TMDS_D1-
0.1
C4016 0.1 F
C4017 0.1 F
R4010
33
R4018
33
R4408
430 +-1%
C4052
C4014
0.1 F
HD0
HA4
RD
HA3
HA2
MEMCS0
HA1
HA0
HDVCC+1.8V
0.1 F
HD2
HA17
HD9
HA7
HD1
HA6
HD8
HA5
B4022 MMZ1608R102CT
R4070
75 +-1%
6.3V 100 KA
MEMCS0
RD
WR
SD_A0
SD_A1
SD_A2
SD_A3
SD_A4
SD_A5
SD_A6
SD_A7
SD_A8
SD_A9
SD_A10
SD_A11
SD_D0
SD_D1
SD_D2
SD_D3
SD_D4
SD_D5
SD_D6
SD_D7
SD_D8
SD_D9
SD_D10
SD_D11
SD_D12
SD_D13
SD_D14
SD_D15
RAMCS0#
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#
SD_BA0
RAMDQM
RAMWE#
RAMCLK
390 +-1%
DAC_VIDEO_C
DAC_VIDEO_B
DAC_VIDEO_D
DAC_VIDEO_A
DAC_VIDEO_E
C4012
HD10
HA18
MMZ1608R102CT
0.1 F
B
R4001
JG4018
B4015
0.1 F
0.01 B
1
193 RFINP
253 GPCI/O[51]
SSCCLK / GPCI/O[59]
SSCTXD / GPCIO[60]
194 RFINN
254 GPCI/O[47]
SSCRXD / GPCIO[17]
195
255 GPCI/O[16]
MEMCS[1]
196 ADCIN[A]
VDDP
256 GNDP
MEMAD[15]
MEMAD[16]
MEMAD[14]
MEMAD[13]
MEMAD[12]
MEMDA[15]
MEMAD[11]
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP/HDMI IC
MEMDA[7]
IC4001
GNDP
ZR36888HLCG
MEMAD[10]
MEMDA[14]
MEMAD[9]
MEMDA[6]
MEMAD[8]
MEMDA[13]
MEMDA[5]
MEMAD[20]
VDDP
MEMDA[12]
MEMWR/
MEMDA[4]
VDDC
MEMDA[11]
MEMDA[3]
MEMAD[19]
GNDC
MEMDA[10]
MEMAD[18]
GNDP
MEMDA[2]
MEMAD[17]
MEMDA[9]
MEMAD[7]
MEMDA[1]
MEMAD[6]
MEMDA[8]
MEMAD[5]
VDDP
MEMDA[0]
126 S/PDIFOUT
MEMAD[4]
MEMRD/
127 AOUT[2] / ADPWMN[0]
65 VDDUSB
MEMAD[3]
66 USBDP
128 AOUT[1] / ADPWMP[1]
MEMAD[2]
67 USBDN
129 AOUT[0]/ADPWMN[1]
MEMCS[0]/
68 GNDUSB
MEMAD[1]
130 GPCI/O[65]
MEMAD[0]
69 RAMADD[4]
GNDP
VDD-IP
VDDP
GPCI/O[61]
GPCI/O[62]
RAMCKE
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128
C4007
7
GND
TRAY_OPEN
TRAY_CLOSE
VDDPWM3.3V
HOME
TOUT_SW
TIN_SW
DVD/CD
DRVSB
RF
OPU_A
OPU_B
OPU_C
OPU_D
OPU_E
OPU_F
VC
SPDL_SENSSPDL_SENS+
DVD/CDPD
DVD_LD
CD_LD
SPINDLE_PWM
SLED_PWM
TRACK_PWM
FOCUS_PWM
P.CON+A5V
P.CON+3.3V
VCC+6V
M_GND
P.CON+5V
P.CON+3.3V
GND
B4005
C4031
C4013
HD11
HD3
HA19
GPCI/O[57]
GNDDABS2
GNDDACP
RSET
DAC1
VDDDAC
DAC2
DAC3
VDDDAC
DAC4
DAC5
VDDDACD
DAC6
GNDDACD
GNDDACD
AVDDT18
AGNDC
HDCSET
AGNDP
HDTXDP2
HDTXDN2
AVDDP
HDTXDP1
HDTXDN1
AGNDP
HDTXDP0
HDTXDN0
AVDDP
HDTXCP
HDTXCN
AGNDP
AHGND
AHVDD
GCLKP
XO
VDDA
RESET/
GNDA
GNDP
VDDP
ADPWMN[7]
ADPWMP[7]
ADPWMN[6]
ADPWMP[6]
ADPWMN[5]
ADPWMP[5]
VDDC
GNDC
ADPWMN[4]
ADPWMP[4]
ADPWMN[3]
ADPWMP[3]
VDDP
ADPWMN[2]
GNDP
GPCI/O[25]
GPCI/O[20]
ADPWMP[2]
VDDP-A2
AMCLK
GNDP-A2
ABCLK
ALRCLK
8
FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE
MMZ1608R102CT
B4001
MMZ1608R102CT
C4081
F
+1.8V
+3.3V
0.1 F
C4011_1
0.1
HD12
WR
HD4
B4003
6.3V
47 KA
NC
C4010
MMZ1608R102CT
C4069
HA10
HD14
HA9
HD6
HA8
HD13
HD5
0.1 F
2
F
C4102 6.3V 100 KA
3
NC
NC
C4008
0.1
HA15
HA16
HA14
HA13
HA12
HD15
HA11
HD7
C4077
4
HA0
HA1
HA2
HA3
HA4
HA5
HA6
HA7
HA8
HA9
HA10
HA11
HA12
HA13
HA14
HA15
HA16
HA17
HA18
HA19
HA20
HD0
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
HD5
HD6
HD7
HD8
HD9
HD10
HD11
HD12
HD13
HD14
HD15
SYS_MUTE
AMCLK
ABCLK
ALRCLK
DAC_VIDEO_C
DAC_VIDEO_B
DAC_VIDEO_D
DAC_VIDEO_A
DAC_VIDEO_E
MD
MC
ML
P.CON+5V
P-H/I-L
GND
RESET
ASDATA0
MMZ1608R102CT
6.3V 100 KA C4082
C4026 0.1 F
6.3V 100 KA C4044
C4051
0.1 F
6.3V 100 KA C4074
NC
NC
6
B4002
W865 MMZ1608R102CTVDDAFERF
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192
JG4003
GND
P.CON+3.3V
H
FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO
B4016
RAMADD[3]
RAMADD[5]
RAMADD[2]
RAMADD[6]
VDDP
RAMADD[1]
RAMADD[7]
RAMADD[0]
GNDP
RAMADD[8]
VDDC
RAMADD[10]
GNDC
RAMADD[9]
VDDP
RAMADD[11]
RAMCS[0]/
RAMBA[0]
GNDP
RAMCS[1]/
RAMRAS/
RAMCAS/
VDDP
RAMWE/
RAMDQM
GNDPCLK
PCLK
VDDPCLK
RAMDAT[8]
GNDP
RAMDAT[7]
RAMDAT[9]
RAMDAT[6]
VDDP
RAMDAT[10]
RAMDAT[5]
RAMDAT[11]
GNDP
RAMDAT[4]
VDDC
RAMDAT[12]
GNDC
RAMDAT[3]
VDDP
RAMDAT[13]
RAMDAT[2]
RAMDAT[14]
GNDP
RAMDAT[1]
RAMDAT[15]
RAMDAT[0]
VDDP
CPUNMI
GNDP
ADPWMP[0]
IDGPCIO[0]
TOUT_SW
JG4001
JG4002
GPCI/O[52]
GPCI/O[53]
GPCI/O[54]
G
W817
256255 254 253 252251 250 249 248 247 246245 244 243242 241 240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R4051
0.001 B
C4032
TIN_SW
TRAY_CLOSE
FROM/TO MEMORY
5
4.7K
0.001 B
C4096
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
R4039
4.7K
R4036
R4037
R4038
JG4004
(D_GND)
DUPTD1
1SS355 DUPRD1
1SS355 DUPTD0
1SS355 DUPRD0
FOCUS_PWM
SLED_PWM
DRVSB
(MUTE-L)
SPINDLE_PWM
C4003
B4011
4.7K
TP4009
GNDP
P.CON+5V
TP4008
R4406 4.7K
D1_1
VDD-IP
JG009
R4078
4.7K
JG4007
JG4008
C4033
DUPRD0
0.027 B
C4002
0.1 F
R4061
11K
R4052
IRRCV
0.027 B MMZ1608R102CT
4.7K
R4062
39K
TRACK_PWM
DUPTD0
JG008
B4012 MMZ1608R102CTC4056
JG007
JG029
R4060
11K
R4404
DUPRD1
R4063
15K
DUPTD1
C4117
1SS355
100P CH
D4004
B4009
D4003
MMZ1608 C4001
R102CT 0.0012 B D4002
JG006
R4021
R4020
R4019
D4005
R4072
BOOT1
JG005
10
JG004
7
4.7K
BOOT2
JG4006
R4402
33
33
33
JG003
DUPTD1
DUPRD1
DUPTD0
DUPRD0
PWMCI[0]
PWMCI[6]
GPCI/O[46]
VDDPWMS
PWMCO[4]
GNDPWMS
GPCI/O[44]
PWMCO[2]
UNREG+3.8V
JG002
JG4005
C4038
0.01 B
JG001
P-H/I-L
8
TRAY_OPEN
TP4005
MD
TP4006 MC
TP4004
ML
P.CON+5V
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SCHEMATIC
F
DIAGRAM (DVD MT PCB)
C4065
E
3.9K +-1%
D
C4076
C
VDDDAC
B
220
A
THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
E
1
ARE
ATTENTION
:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN
ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
F
G
H
H-2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
8
8
(DVD MT PCB)
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
1
2
4
5
6
7
3
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CS
19
RAMCS1#
A11
BA0
RAS
20
HA1
NC
SD_BA0
A9
BA1
21
HA2
CKE
RAMRAS#
RAMCS0#
A8
A10/AP
22
A1
HA3
RAMCAS#
CAS
SD_A10
A7
A0
23
A0
HA4
RAMDQM
RAMWE#
WE
SD_A0
A6
A1
24
A2
HA5
LDQM
SD_D7
0.1 F
SD_A1
A5
A2
SD_A2
A4
A3
SD_A9
SD_A8
SD_A7
SD_A6
SD_A5
SD_A4
28
CE#
17
A3
18
GND
19
A4
20
OE#
HA6
21
A5
HA7
22
DQ0
HA17
23
A6
SD_A11
24
33
32
31
30
DQ8
29
RD
A7
28
HD0
A17
DQ1
27
HD8
DQ9
26
HD1
A18
25
HD9
DQ2
CLK
VDD
25
12
HA18
UDQM
DQ7
R4048
47K
JG4035 NC
HD2
NC
SD_D6
VSSQ
26
A19
RAMCLK
W838 HA19
VSS
SD_D5
VSS
5
SD_A3
4
C4047
VDD
27
DQ10
14
WP#
15
DQ3
46
JG4034 NC
RAMDQM
16
35
34
HD10
DQ8
DQ6
C4046
0.1 F
HD3
45
VPP
VDDQ
DQ5
0.1 F
RESET
13
36
DQ11
DQ9
VDDQ
C4041
WR
C4039
HD11
6
SD_D4
0.1 F
HA20
SD_D8
0.1 F
44
RP#
DQ10
43
VCC
SD_D9
VSSQ
42
WE#
SD_D10
41
DQ4
JG4033
HA19
40
A20
SD_D3
C4045
39
DQ12
9
A19
DQ4
38
HD4
DQ5
10
39
HD12
11
40
HD5
DQ3
DQ11
0.1 F
SD_D11
W837
VSSQ
DQ12
8
54
53
52
51
50
49
VDDQ
C4040
37
HA8
SD_D2
0.1 F
36
HA9
SD_D1
DQ2
48
DQ13
DQ1
47
DQ14
SD_D13
SD_D12
HA0
HA1
HA2
HA3
HA4
HA5
HA6
HA7
HA8
HA9
HA10
HA11
HA12
HA13
HA14
HA15
HA16
HA17
HA18
HA19
HA20
HD0
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
HD5
HD6
HD7
HD8
HD9
HD10
HD11
HD12
HD13
HD14
HD15
0.1 F
HA0
4.7K
FLASHCS
R4040
4
SD_D14
SD_D0
C4050
35
3
4
HA10
DQ0
VDDQ
34
A8
VSSQ
33
A9
DQ13
HA11
VDD
32
DQ6
DQ15
31
A10
5
DQ14
VSS
SD_D15
6
46
45
44
A11
HA12
7
HD13
DQ7
HA13
8
HD6
A12
43
HD14
DQ15
42
HD7
A13
41
HD15
GND
C4062
5
7
64M SDRAM IC
IC4005 M12L64164A-7TG
30
HA14
0.1 F
29
A14
1
VCCQ
HA15
2
48
A15
38
6
A16
C4064
37
7
HA16
47
FLASH IC 16M IC
IC4007 SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
SD_A0
SD_A1
SD_A2
SD_A3
SD_A4
SD_A5
SD_A6
SD_A7
SD_A8
SD_A9
SD_A10
SD_A11
SD_D0
SD_D1
SD_D2
SD_D3
SD_D4
SD_D5
SD_D6
SD_D7
SD_D8
SD_D9
SD_D10
SD_D11
SD_D12
SD_D13
SD_D14
SD_D15
RAMCS0#
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#
SD_BA0
RAMDQM
RAMWE#
RAMCLK
B4007
MEMCS0
RD
WR
MMZ1608R102CT
C4063
6.3V 220 KA
C4021
C4099
0.01 B
C4095
0.01 B
P.CON+3.3V
6.3V 100 KA
B4008
3
3
MMZ1608R102CT
GND
4.7K
R4044
DEBUG MODE
FROM AUDIO/VIDEO
NC
RESET
2
W854
2
MEMCS0
PCB130
DMF071
1
H-3
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
A
B
C
1
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
D
E
F
G
H
H-4
A
B
C
D
H
8
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
CD_LD
DVD_LD
DVD/CD
(VR_CD/VR_DVD)
VC
DVD/CDPD
FROM/TO LOADER
DVD/CD
DVD_LD
CD_LD
DVD/CDPD
RF
OPU_A
OPU_B
OPU_C
OPU_D
OPU_E
OPU_F
VC
HOME
GND
GND
CP2301
LD07T2-24ND-03
FO-
0.1
TO LOADER
C2329_1
F
CP2302
00_6232_005_006_800+
4
LD+
3
OPEN
2
GND(D)
1
CLOSE
6.3V 47 KA
0.1 F
C2316_1
C2337
C2343_1
6.3V 47 KA
0.1 F
0.1 F
C2342
C2346_1
6.3V 47 KA
C2347
F
6.3V 47 KA
MOT_LDMOT_LD+
1
C2341_1
TP2308
CD LD CTL 1.0
6.3V 100 KA
R2333
3.9
Q2302
KTA1544T-RTK/P
220
4.5
R2340
6.8
JG019
C2348
R2353 TOUT_SW
100
R2352
0.1
C2332
TP2303
LD-
MMZ1608R102CT
OPU_VREF
C2328_1
4.7K
MMZ1608R102CT
B2302
6.3V 47 KA
0.1 F
C2315
R2313
R2341
6.8
B
SPDL_SENS+
SPDL_SENS-
5
TP2323
TRAY_CLOSE
TP2324
TRAY_OPEN
M_GND
VC2
R2320
R2310
4.7K
4.7K
R2338
TIN_SW
VCC+6V
5.6K
GND(PDIC)
6.3V 100 KA
R2335
24
SLED_PWM
C2340_1
3.3K
B2301
JG012
C2331
390
Vref
R2336
VCC
23
OPU_E
DVD/CD
0
Q2304
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
SPINDLE_PWM
FOCUS_PWM
10K
22
OPU_F
JG014
TP2307
R2347
0.7
OPU_D
JG015
1.2K
220
1.0
0.1
R2334
E
0.1 3.3K
6
R2339
1K
F
21
JG013
0
6.8
R2332
3.9
33K
20
OPU_A
4.5
R2324
D
OPU_B
JG010
0.7 3.3K
R2319
19
JG011
0
R2348
TP2320
A
0.1
VDDPWM3.3V
DRVSB
4.7K
B
18
OPU_C
R2327
17
JG040
TRACK_PWM
5.6K
C
DVD LDCTL
Q2301
KTA1505S
-Y-RTK/P
6.8
R2318
TP2318
RF
16
DVD_CD
JG016
RF
R2346
R2326
DVD/CD
15
VR DVD
Q2305
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
27K
TP2319
14
82
DVD/CDPD
R2309
MON(COM)
MMZ1608R102CT
R2306
100 +-1%
GND(CD)
13
VR DVD
Q2303
KTC3875S_Y_RTK 0
R2321
12
TIN_SW
P.CON+A5V
TRACK_PWM
FOCUS_PWM
P.CON+3.3V
B2303
R2359
VR/CD
10K
VOL(CD)
R2305
11
DVDLD
CDLD
7
TOUT_SW
B2304
MMZ1608R102CT
75K
LD(CD)
JG018
JG017
R2307
LD(DVD)
JG056
TP2321
9
10
RF_A5V
R2301
GND(DVD)
VR/DVD
1K
TP2322
8
NC
10K
VOL(DVD)
R2308
NC(SW)
7
82
MON(DVD)
6
5
(RF_GND)
FO+
DVD/CDPD
R2356
F+
1K
4
TR+
R2355
F-
33
T+
3
R2360
2
TR-
C2309
T-
0.1 B
1
5
5
G
(DVD MT PCB)
DM3S/3O
6
F
MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
8
7
E
4.7K
VD2-
VD1-
VD1+
NC
VCC1
VCCS
VIN1+A
VIN1-A
VIN 1
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
10K
TP2317
R2330
NC
NC
VIN3-
VIN3
VIN-OP
REG-IN
4
3.3K
VD2+
7
NC
R2354
PGND1
6
VIN2+
PGND2
5
VIN2
REG-OUT
VD3-
4
VIN2-
VREF-OUT
VD3+
3
VO_OP
VREF-IN
VD4-
2
VIN+OP
VIN4
VD4+
1
NC
NC
VLD+
23
VIN4-
24
VLD-
25
MUTE234
26
NC
27
MUTE1
28
VCC2
29
R2337
NC
NC
30
VCONT
31
TP2316
NC
32
REV
33
S-GND
LA6565VR-TLM-E
MOTOR DRIVE IC
IC2301
C2360
100P CH
100P CH
100P CH
100P CH C2358
NC
NC
3
HOME
1.2
C2305
0.1 B
2
JG058
MOT_SLED+
MOT_SLED-
MOT_SPDL-
MOT_SPDL+
FO-
FO+
TR-
R2302 0.1 B
0.1 F
C2310_1
0.1 B
JG057
TR+
MOT_LD+
MOT_LD-
C2317
C2314_1
C2307
100 +-1%
2.2
120
D2304 1SS355
0.1 B
R2304
1K
R2358
B
C2303
R2357
0.022
2.2
C2304
0.1 B
R2323
2
C2302
R2303
4.7K
10V 100 KA
0.1 B
1.2
C2313
R2329
MOT_SPDL+
10V 100 KA
MOT_SPDL-
C2365
6.8K
R2328
MOT_SLED+
D23031SS355
R2325
100 MOT_SLED-
C2306 0.1 F
SP1+
NC
34
TP2315
1
35
TP2314
SP1-
36
TP2313
SLD+
2
37
TP2312
3
38
TP2311
SLD-
39
TP2310
LIMIT SW
4
40
TP2309
5
TP2306
R2349
41
F
SW(GND)
42
0.1
6
43
C2301
3
C2357
FROM/TO LOADER
C2359
4.7K
R2342
P.CON+3.3V
CP2303
00_6232_006_006_800+
NC
NC
44
1K
TP2305
TP2304
FWD
4.7K
4
4.7K
R2351
R2350
100
PCB130
DMF071
1
1
H-5
A
B
PIECES REPAREES PAR UN
ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
C
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
D
E
F
THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
G
H
H-6
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DVD MT PCB)
1uH 0305
W818
C8127
C8124
150P CH
12P CH
L8105
150P CH
C8115
DAC_VIDEO_A
8
W815
8
CVBS/G/Y
DAC_A_VIDEO
6
C/B/U
7
C8106
0305
CVBS/C
C8108
DAC_VIDEO_B
DAC_E_VIDEO
1uH
C8109
150P CH
12P CH
L8103
0305
150P CH
10
C8107
W820
C8111
C8102
DAC_VIDEO_E
1uH
C8103
C8101
100P CH
DVD-H
SYS_MUTE
12P CH
L8101
0305
TP8102
1K
P-H/I-L
TP8106
RESET
5
TP8103
TP8105
DAC_A_VIDEO
ZERO
6
TP8101
R8101
DVD-H
W831
1uH 0305
P-H/I-L
TP8115
DAC_E_VIDEO
C8112
C8110
150P CH
12P CH
L8104
150P CH
DAC_VIDEO_D
33P CH
RESET
MC
MD
ML
AMCLK
ABCLK
ALRCLK
ASDATA0
DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO
9
P.CON+5V
6
7
DAC_B_VIDEO
8
W819
1uH
Y/R/V
150P CH
C8104
DAC_VIDEO_A
DAC_VIDEO_C
DAC_VIDEO_B
DAC_VIDEO_D
DAC_VIDEO_E
12P CH
L8102
150P CH
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
DAC_C_VIDEO
C8105
DAC_VIDEO_C
7
D8111
W826
TP8107
1SS355
R_AUDIO
TP8108
L_AUDIO
TP8109
5
W824
TP8110
DAC_C_VIDEO
TP8113
DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO
TP8114
D8112
1SS355
FROM/TOTUNER/JACK
C8122
C8119
10V 100 YK
F
TP8112
SYS_MUTE
B8103
4
DAC_B_VIDEO
CP8101_1 (CP8001_1)
IMSA-9604S-16F
0.001 B
TO MEMORY
0.1
C8120
GND
W833
MMZ1608R102CT
RESET
C8114
R8113
1 B
C8125
470
4
R8112
1 B
C8126
470
5
1 B
11
3.3
13
0
BCK
1
SCK
2
1.6
DATA
3
1.1
ML
MD
12
0
NC
1.6
LRCK
4
DGND
5
0
MC
NC
VDD
VCC
ZEROR/ZEROA
VCOM
10
15
P-H/I-L
14
Y(G)
13
DVD-H
12
4
11
ZERO
10
AUDIO-R
9
GND
AUDIO-L
8
GND
V(R)
6
GND
4
U(B)
3
GND
2
CVBS
1
7
5
3
14
15
16
0
3.3
1.7
ASDATA0
ALRCLK
ABCLK
AMCLK
ML
MD
ZERO
2
MC
2.4
C8121
2
6
3.3
10V 100 YK
9
0
7
4.9
VOUTL
VOUTR
8
2.5
AGND
STEREO DAC IC
IC8102 PCM1753DBQR
2.4
ZEROL/NA
3
16
GND
DVD RESET
1 B
C8113
DVD CVBS
PCB130
DMF071
H-7
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
G
H
H-8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
HDMI/USB SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
8
8
(DVD MT PCB)
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
I/TMDS_D2+
1
4
I/TMDS_D2-
2
3
L5901
ACM2012H-900-2P
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
AT+5.2V
R6603
R6614
4
USB_DN
L5902
ACM2012H-900-2P
27
R6615
3
USB_DP
CEC
13
NC
NC
14
SCL
15
SDA
16
GND
17
POWER
18
I2CCLK
HOTPLUG
19
I2CDAT
S 5.0
R5910
1.8K
R5904
10K
HDMI DET
R5901
C6603
HDMI_DET
Q5901
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
10K
5
+5V
4
3
USB_DP
2
GND
1
5
GND
4
P.CON+3.3V
(HDVCC+3.3V)
5.0
5.0
HDMI 5V REG
Q5902
KTA1281_Y
(HDMI_GND)
0.7
0
KA
25V 10
4.7K
C5901
1K
R5907
1SS355
0
3
4.7K
HDMI 5V REG
Q5903
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
3
(USB PCB)
4.2
R5908
1K
D5901 R5906
1K
R5903
R5902
P.CON+5V
1K
R5905
4
D 5.0
R6606
C5902
0.1
F
1.8K
9.0
G
LEVEL_CONV
Q5905
2SK3018T106
C6606
NC
15K
12
VIN
C6610
CLK-
/FLG
+5V
USB_DN
68P CH
11
15K
10
HCB2012K-600T25 RB051L-40
C6609
9.0
9
VOUT
25V 10 KA
MMZ1608R102CT
D0-
EN
GND
F
B5901
LEVEL_CONV
Q5904
2SK3018T106
S 5.0 R5909
D
8
6
CP6601 (CP6602)
A2001WR2-5P
D6601
0.1
5.0
G
7
B6601
R6613
D5903
AVRL161A1R1NT
D0+
D0-S
CLK+
3
D5902
AVRL161A1R1NT
VCC+6V
6
USB CUTIENT LIMITATION
IC6601
RT9702-PB
C6602
2
VCC+6V
D1-
CLK-S
4
L5904
ACM2012H-900-2P
5
5
C6604
1
I/TMDS_CLK-
4
D1-S
C6605
I/TMDS_CLK+
3
D1+
3
25V 10 KA
2
2
D2-
F
I/TMDS_D0-
1
0.1
6
D2+
D2-S
10K
L5903
ACM2012H-900-2P
R6605
4
5
1
4
I/TMDS_D0+
1
NC
27
HDMI CONNECTOR
CP5901
1903015-3
2
2
3
I/TMDS_D1-
6.3V 47 KA
1
7
68P CH
I/TMDS_D1+
100K
DVD-H
7
CP6602 (CP6001)
A2001WR2-5P
GND
5
4
+5V
3
USB_DN
2
USB_DP
1
GND
CP6603
C33F-004-5079A
B6602
+5V
HCB2012K-600T25
W809
W810
+5V
1
USB_DN
2
USB_DP
3
GND
4
PCBDD0
DEF091
2
2
PCB130
DMF071
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
1
H-9
A
B
C
D
1
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
E
F
G
H
H-10
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(VCR MT PCB)
P.CON+5V
P.CON+5V
C144
0.01 B
FSC
R132
C161
C152
22P CH
3.3
6.3V 47 KA
F
0.1
C156
W815
W817
12K
R139
3.9
3.3K
Y/C_CLK
Y/C_DATA
22K
H.SW
Y/C_CS
C.ROTARY
AUDIO_MUTE-H
R138
R137
4.9
R129
1.8K
P.CON+5V
8
BUFFER
Q109
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
12K
FROM POWER
7
1/4W
22K
R136
ENV.DET
COMP
H.AMP_SW
8
7
GND
1
GND
B
0.022
0.01
B
R126
CH
22P
C160
29
28
2.1
27
C138
CTLCTL+
TU/REAR_V_IN
MAIN
EMPHA S
DET
FIL
16
17
18
0 2.6 NC 2.6
H.AMP_SW
COMP
C139
ENV.DET
F
H.SW
FRONT_V_IN
C.SYNC
50V 0.22 YK
1.6
3.6
C102
25V 10
4.1
5.0
4.4
50V 22 YK
3.2
B
2.1
19
0.2
20
2.8
R141
KA
DVD_V_OUT
100
4
16
W801
Y/C_VIDEO_OUT
C.SYNC
DUMMY_V.SYNC
L104_1
22uH
C132
1
4.7K
15
B
AUDIO_MUTE-H
P.CON+5V
0305
B
6.3V 100 KA
Y-VCC
5
C.ROTARY
2.3
26
V.SYNC
SEP
R
Y-GND
2.0
DUMMY_V.SYNC
C137
C131
14
1.4
2.2K 1/4W
R123
40
39
38
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
13
1.1
Y/C_CS
100K
2.3
SOPB
FM
AGC
FIL
R122
V.REC_ST-H
B
0.1
25
P
3
R144
220K
1/4W
F
C124
C125
B
R112
330K
4.1
24
R
P
R119
12
1.1
R117
8.2K
11
4.8
C122
C118
6DB
QV/QH
SUB
LPF
C126
R114
0.0012
C120
R110
10
0.8
15K
9
2.3
20K
8.2K
PB
FM EQ S-EQ
FM
AGC
6.8K
1K
1/4W
8
2.3
820
7
0
KA
6
2.3
R
AUTO PHASE PHASE
EQ
EQ
BIAS
fo-ADJ Q-ADJ
C123
2.3
2.6
23
AGC
TC2
390P CH
REC:LP<EP
PB:EP
5
4
2.3
R111
10V 33 KA
C115
6.3V 220 KA
C110
1.8K
C148
1
B
R131
1.5K
FM
DEM
MAIN
DE-EM
50V 4.7
3
2.3
2.6
Y/C_DATA
C134
C136
SYNC
SEP
VHS
R115
2.3
22K
16V 47 YK
P
MUTE
B
2
1
REC
AMP
PB,EE
EQ
AMP
SP,LP
Vref
2.3V
0
BIAS OSC
0 Q104
KTC3203_Y
DOUBBLE
LIM
REC
FM-EQ
P
C133
3.2
3.3
Y/C_CLK
82K
R
NORMAL
R116
PB,EE
R108
4FSC
R124
1 B
22
VREF
2.5
21
62
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
ALC
DET
5.2
0
BAL
TC1
R
Y/C
MIX
NC1
R
A-VCC
C112
5.2
PB-C
Y-LPF
NL
EMPHA
19
2
FROM_NORMAL_A
MMTS
0305 0
N.L.
DEEM
CLAMP
P
LINE
AMP
LPF
P
25V 10 KA
10K
R
220
R103
ALC
C119_1
0.7
1
2
3
C116
0.01
680
100uH
R102
10K
A-GND
B
3
2.2
C135
1/2
FBC
FM
MOD
0.01
4
3.2
FROM/TO SYSCON
1.6
0
R
R
P
R-EQ
TEST
C117
2
REG
4V
VIDEO
AGC
P
P
2.3
0
18
V.ENV
TP101
NC
PCB010
DME063
HOT
FE HEAD(HOT)
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
1
H-11
0.7
0
0
5
BIAS CTL
Q105
KTA1266
L102
1
2
3
PB-C
R
FRONT_V_IN
50V 1 YK
P
R113
CP103
B2013H02-2P
2 FE HEAD(GND)
AUDIO PB SW
Q102
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
1
20
C101
TO FULL ERASE HEAD
0
AUDIO PB SW
Q101
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
0
100V 0.033
CH
C140
CD102
2F041508
15P
2
560
6
R
NL
EMPHA
F
W819
COIL,BIAS OSC
L101
1626010
ACC
AMP
L
0.1
R101
FFC
C108
B
5.3
3.9K
1/4W
SW
Q103
KRA103SRTK
R107
2.2K
0
VCP
YNR/COMB
R
R109
B
R140
V.REC_ST-H
5.2
C106
CTL-
0.01
CTL-
2.3
B
Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP IC
IC101
LA71206M-MPB-E
B
1
C174
P.CON+5V 6.3V 47 KA
C107
CTL+
CTL+
C109
0.1
0.015
2
1/4W
1K
R106
AUDIO PB
C104
AUDIO REC
3
0
16V 22 KA
F
6.3V 220 KA
4
1
R105
TO_NORMAL_A
S802X S802Y
3
C105
1.6
BUFFER
Q107
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
1
P
DETAIL
ENH
C121
2.3
CP102_1
IMSA-9604S-04C
CLAMP
3.58M
BPF1
ACC
DET
H
P
0.0027
4.9
0
1
B
2.3
C129
B-UP
AMP
Sub
CONV
1
0
HA
PRE GND
0.1 F
1.8
FROM/TO HEAD AUDIO CONTROL
VCA
B.D
4.21M
BPF
74
1.8
W852
Main
CONV
IN
VCA
PB
AMP
P
75
1.8
P.CON+5V
P
3.58M
BPF2
L
76
F
0
4
R
C-LPF
77
EP/LP-CH2 (L)
P
CLAMP
CCD
BGA
BGA
+
1.6
OUT
AUTO-BIAS
DRIVER
R
HA VCC
OUT
CNC
R
P
VSS
PLL
TIMMING
BEFORE
P
R
78
1
R
CLOCK
4Fsc
VSS
79
EP/LP COM
B
REC
AFC
PB
APC
AFTER
80
2
SLD
P
C114
EP/LP-CH1 (R)
820
3
1.8
R142
SP-CH2 (L)
5.0
22uH 0305
C162
4
L107
P.CON+5V
0.1
SP_COM
47 KA
SP-CH1 (R)
5
C163
HF2 (L)
6
6.3V
7
320FH
VCO
VX01
REC
APC
H
1.8
F
HF_COM
1
8
1.9
ALWAYS VDD
5V
C-VCC
SERAIL
DECODER
4FSC
6
BGA
C158
HF1 (R)
L103
B
CP101
TOC-C09X-A1
FROM OPERATION/DISPLAY
1.8K
1.8
AUDIO C-ROT C-GND
MUTE RF-SW
HA SW IN
ACC
DET
F
FSC
B
5.6uH
C127
1.6
0.01
1
0.047
F
680K
P
65
FROM/TO CYL
HA
GND
CHROMA
DET
64
0.047
C165
2.9
63
0
C169
Y/C_VIDEO_OUT
C141
0 5.2 5.2 5.2 4.9 2.1 4.8 4.1 3.2 3.3 3.2 NC 4.9 4.9 1.2 2.2 0.8
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
0 5.2
58
57
COMPOUT ENV
DET
KILL
DET
B
R127
TU/REAR_V_IN
0.1
2.1
61
C166
0.068
F
37
4.8 4.8
60
59
1
DVD_V_OUT
180P CH
HF1
9
3.579545MHZ
X101
100DT3R528
HF_COM
5
B
C147
17
FROM_NORMAL_A
6
1
B
0.022
1
C145
8.2K
TO_NORMAL_A
HF2
C142
6.3V 47 KA
C143
0.1
C154
B
R133
FROM/TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR
FSC
C146
B
C151
FROM/TO TUNER/JACK
A
B
1
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
C
D
E
F
G
H
H-12
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SYSCON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(VCR MT PCB)
TP3002 H.SW
NC
3.3K
R3045
2.2K
R3009
5.1
AFT-S.CURVE
TV/VCR
VIDEO_OUT
DVD_LED
POWER_MUTE-L
44
DVD_POWER_CTL
VIDEO_MUTE-H
DVD_RESET
SYS_MUTE
REM_IN
W867
5.0
REC_L/REEL-T
VCR_POWER_ON-L
0
R3055
FROM/TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR
22K
0
0
R3038
4.7K
R3021
1K
5.0
HIFI_H.SW
AUDIO_MUTE-H
SCL
SDA
ST_SELECT
POWER_FAIL
0.1 F
AT+5V[M-CON]
C3036
5.1
HIFI_ENV.DET
D3002
C.SYNC
1SS133 VSC_L/REEL-S
0.1
0
FROM/TO OPERATION1/DISPLAY
TAB_SW
DVD_LED
0
VCR_LED
2.5
AFT-S.CURVE
3.7
KEY-A
KEY-B
HIFI_ENV.DET
0
REM_IN
ST_SELECT
KEY-A
5.2
KEY-B
3G/TV/VCR_LED
10K
5G/CS/BS_LED
SEG_1
SEG_2
10K
R3047
R3046
10K
C3014
2G/DUB/REC_LED
4G/VSC_LED
1 F
C3034
SEG_3
SEG_4
C3049
B
0.0015
SEG_6
SEG_7
3
SEG_8
SEG_10
470K
R3053
SEG_9
SW_V_OUT
C3031
MS_SEN-A
MS_SEN-B
EOT
BOT
ENV.DET
SEG_5
100P CH
10K
1K
R3063
B
4FSC
VIDEO_OUT
4
1G/VCR/T-REC_LED
5.2
R3010
0.001
C3017
F
AT+5V[M-CON] 0.1
C3065
470K
5
REC_MUTE_H
VIDEO_MUTE-H
AT+5.2V
AT+5.2V
1 F
6
SDA
VCR_LED
0
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
29
AV_SW1
AV_SW2
SCL
1G/VCR/T-REC_LED
R3036
52
51
50
49
48
2G/DUB/REC_LED
47
5.0
46
45
5.6K
SW_V_OUT
4G/VSC_LED
3G/TV/VCR_LED
1SS133
KA
12uH
C3044
12P CH
C3038
DVD_POWER_CTL
RF_CH_SW
5G/CS/BS_LED
5.0
4.7
30
MS SEN-A
MS SEN-B
EOT-H
BOT-H
V ENV
AVSS (GND)
4FSCIN/2FSCIN
4FSCOUT/2FSCOUT
OVSS(GND)
CV OUT
OVCC
CV IN1
CV IN2
V CYNC
AFC LPF
C SYNC/H SYNC
ST SELECT
Y/C_CS
Y/C_DATA
Y/C_CLK
4FSC
FROM/TO TUNER/JACK
180P CH
53
54
55 56
VSS (GND)
SEG2
SEG3
IIC CLK
SEG4
SEG5
IIC SDA
SO1/TX
SI1/RX
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
SEG9
JUST_CLK
SEG10
AFC OSC
HiFi ENV
H.SW
Y/C_CLK
5.0
D3007
R3043
B
H.SW
AT+5V[M-CON]
SEG_2
R3044 3.3K
SEG_3
SCL
SEG_4
SDA
W840
47K 1/4W
W839
TX
SEG_5
SEG_6
R3028
SEG_7
SEG_8
SEG_9
FWE
SEG_10
47K
X2
FWE
OSC1
/RESET
OSC2
X1
470
L3003
27
AT+5.2V
SCL
SDA
1
F
AT+5V[M-CON]
C3002
SDA
VSS
6
SCL
220 YK
7
A2
D3009
1SS133
5.0
TEST
0
0
A1
5.0
8
4.9
5
VCC
3
5.2
A0
2
6.3V
1
C3023
R3051
GND
2
TX
EEP ROM IC
IC3099_1
BR24L02F-WE2
0
4
0 REEL SENS
Q3001
RPI-303
IN
25V10 KA
5.2
5.2
NC
OUT
C3030
0.1 F
47K
C3021_1
3
4
C3045
5.0
3
4
NC
0
18K
PST3231NR
5
NC
0
50V 0.47 KA
1.2
SYSTEM RESET IC
1
R3049
NC
IC3003
2
RESET
6.3V 47 KA
F
C3027
VSC_L/REEL-S
47K
2.4
47K
2.4
R3006
R3019
120 1/4W
1
0.001 B
1.3
1.2
C3000
4
REEL SENS
Q3002 RPI-303
0.4
2
0.001
B
33K
1.3
R3083
3
1
4
R3050
1
0.9
5.1
2
C3035
0.9
3
33K
5.1
2
100 1/4W
R3087
5.1
MS_SEN B
Q3004
RPI-352C40N
R3002
MS_SEN A
Q3005
RPI-352C40N
1/4W
REC_L/REEL-T
MS_SEN-A
MS_SEN-B
P.CON+5V
AT+5.2V
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
AFT S.CURVE
ENV.DET
Y/C_DATA
5.0
3.3
7
COMP
JG3002 JG3003 JG3004 JG3005 JG3006 JG3007 JG3008
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
PG
R3025
22
C3015
820P
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
25
SW_V_OUT
TAB_SW
2
VSS (GND)
R3027 C3019
1/4W
16V
47K
AT+5.2V
22 KA
R3011
C3052
TAB SW
SW3001
LSA-1144EAU
560
3
R3037
12P CH
VCL
6.3V 47
KA
16V 22 KA
R3020
CTL-
C3016
C3013
TAB SW
W837
W838
5.0
4
5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
6
7
8
0 2.5 0.1 2.6 2.5 2.3 5.1 2.0 2.0 1.5 0.4
0 3.1 2.6 5.1 2.6
0 0 2.5
0 2.6
0
0 1.3 1.3
50V 2.2
560
0.001 B
6.8K
C3010
R3007
270K
C3024
2
3
0 2.5
R3017
CTL+
R3026
MD0
CAP LIMIT
REC MUTE-H
85
86
89
90
91
92
1/4W
R3016
VSS (GND)
1
270
330K
R3004
29 KEY-B
DUMMY_V.SYNC
0
(LED_GND)
112 VCC (BACK UP)
R3030
5.1
AT+5V[M-CON]
BOT
CAP PWM
30 KEY-A
C3032
EOT
DRUM PWM
111 C SYNC
C3022
0.4
C.SYNC
31 ST SELECT
HIFI H.SW
470P B
0.001
0
POWER FAIL
AVCC (BACK UP)
AFC PC
1/4W 0
56K
DUMMY_V.SYNC
2.7
D FG/PG
VIDEO H.SW
SVCC (P.CON5V)
R3012
VSC_L/ REEL S
1K
B
SYNC DET/ REC_L/ REEL T
CAP FULL
CYL SPEED UP
B
0.022
B
C3004
VIDEO_MUTE-H
C3001
B
COMP
C3029
0
C3006
5.0
5.0
EOT SENSOR
Q3006
ST-304L
0
0.001 B
C3005
D3001
LTE-3271T-012A-O
0.1
POWER ON-L
0.1
AT+5.2V
R3014 56K 2.7
OEC0157B
1
2.5
HIFI_H.SW
C3007
REM IN
RX
RX DRIVE
Q3007
KRC103SRTK
0
4.8
DVD LED
REC_L/ REEL T
H.AMP SW
CAP FG
2.5
H.SW
CTL+
H.AMP_SW
0
SEG_1
0.3
IC3001
B
3.0
AUDIO_MUTE-H
CTL-
0
5.0
SYSCON/TIMER/SERVO IC
CAP_FG0.0015
1K
R3001
5.6K
0
21
1M
R3008
0.1 F
C3009
10K
R3031
C.ROTARY
CTL SMT(I)
CONTROL_IN
2.7
CAP FWD-L
C.ROTARY
0
VCR LED
DVD RESET
CTL AMP(O)
R3032
LDM_CTL
R3056
CYL_DRIVE
CYL_FG/PG
4
87
0
COMP
3G/TV/VCR LED
DVD_POWER_CTL
C3041
24
CYL_DRIVE
BOT SENSOR
Q3008
ST-304L
88
0
H.AMP_SW
B
V.REC ST-H
CTL FB
CYL CTL
0.0047
AUDIO MUTE-H
CTL BIAS
12
LDM_CTL
CYL_FG/PG
Y/C DATA
C3018 R3022
LDM CTL
CYL FG/PG
54
150P CH 150K
CAP CTL
11
2.5
C.ROTARY
C3008
CONTROL_IN
10
0
CAP_F/R
AT+12.6_V
POWER MUTE-L
B
LD/CY VCO
87
0.1
GND
8
F
SEG1
15K
7
2.4
LDM_CTL
1
55
1G/VCR/T-REC_LED
Y/C CS
RF CH SW
CTL(-)
MOTOR GND
VCR_H
2G/DUB/REC LED
CTL(+)
I LIMIT
6
0
V.REC_ST-H
CAP_LIMIT
4G/TIME SHIFT LED
86
AV SW1
SVSS (GND)
5
0
AUDIO_MUTE-H
CAP_F/R
3.3K
C3040
SERVICE
AV SW2
V.REC_ST-H
5.1
5G/CS/BS LED
56 VCC (BACK UP)
85
93
R3003
5.1
RF_CH_SW
P.CON+5V
VCC
9
5
AT+12.6_V
0.1
W835
Y/C_CS
CAP_FG
CAP.M/F/R
5.0
AV_SW1
W906
4
5.0
5.2
0.1 F
Y/C CLK
94
YK
CP3001
TMC-J12P-B2
3
0
NC
0
C.SYNC
C3061
SYS MUTE
95
10K
R3035
16V 220
CAP FG
5.1
SERVICE
NC
TP3001
AV_SW2
C3033
CAP VCO
5.0
96
B
FROM/TO DECK
2
POWER_MUTE-L
SYS_MUTE
C3066
0.01
1
0
TV/VCR
97
MOTOR_GND
5.0
NC
98
R3015
GND
FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD.AMP
RX DRIVE
Q3003
KRA103SRTK
3.4
0 4.8 4.8 0
60 59 58 57
8
DUMMY_V.SYNC
5.3
NC NC
0 0 NC 0
0
0
0 5.1 3.4 2.5
0 4.8 4.8
0
0 5.1 1.4 1.5
0
0 4.9 5.0 4.8 4.8
3.3
84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
47K 1/4W
22K
AT+5.2V
6
MD0
R3057
CAP_LIMIT
POWER_FAIL
23
112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99
VCR_POWER_ON-L
10MHz
R3034
0.1
AT+5V[M-CON]
7
15P CH
X3001
100GT01006
1M
C3053
P.CON+5V
R3062 1K C3050 0.01 B
RESET
AT+12.6_V
C3025
CTL REF
DVD_POWER_CTL
F R3033
RX
0.022
C3020
TX
AT+5V[M-CON]
B
FROM/TO POWER
10K
W836
AT+5.2V
REC_MUTE_H
AT+5.2V
8
1
2
3
4
0
MD0
RESET
FWE
AT+5V[M-CON]
0
0
PCB010
DME063
0
1
1
H-13
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
H-14
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
TUNER/JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(VCR MT PCB)
P.CON+9V
AV_SW1
SW_V_OUT
Y/C_VIDEO_OUT
DVD_V_OUT
DVD_V
DVD_U
1
Vin2
Vcc
32
11.7
3
6
0.1
C8057
F
CH
C8055
2
6
5
4
C8010_1
CH
C8054
25V 10 KA
7.0
V OUT
E
FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP
SPDIF
P.CON+5V
47uH
L8004
C8031
50V 4.7 KA
W880
R8033
1/4W
33P
SW1
GND
33P
C8047_1
560
6.3V
1000 YK
C8048
1/4W
R8036
75
560 1/4W
75
75 6.3V 470 YK
R8040
L8001
0.33uH
CH
C8058
1
E
DVD_A_OUT_L
10P
L8002
0.33uH
CH
C8060
DVD_A_OUT_R
4
DVD_V_OUT
FSC
TU/REAR_V_IN
1.5K
R8003
5
0305
BLM18BD102SN1
SCL
AV_SW1
AV_SW2
TV/VCR
2 VCC
6.3V 47 KA
C8022
C8021
SDA
1 INPUT
0.1 F
B8001
C8023
0.022 B
3.3K
C8024
220
6.3V 47 KA
4
68
R8007
E
H1
R8005
5
R8002
C8025
W820
H2
1
0.1 B
470
4.7K
R8008
R8012
470
E
3
CO
SYS_MUTE
OPTICAL
OS8001
RFT5CB1
100K
AUDIO MUTE
Q8009
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
H1
2
DVD_RESET
2.2K
R8006
C8028
MUTE SW
0
R8022
Q8011
KRC103SRTK 1K
0
0
L
DVD_POWER_CTL
R8054
2.3
2.2
100P CH
0
DVD AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
J8006
MSP-213V1-732_NI_LF
0
R
5.1
4
RF_CH_SW
3 GND
AFT-S.CURVE
POWER_MUTE-L
VIDEO_MUTE-H
VIDEO_OUT
270
75
R
V
25V 10 KA
H1 NC H1 H2
16V 22 KA
C8042
0.1
F
21
6
5
3
E
2
1
E
L
4
REAR IN JACK
J8002
MSP-213V2-432_NI_LF
YK
C8075_1
NC
R8016
16V 47
R8001
C313_1
2.2K
R80170.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0
MUTE SW
Q8005
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
R
H1
2
3
H2
5
VIDEO_MUTE-H
VIDEO_OUT
REAR_A_IN_R
REAR OUT JACK E 1
J8001
MSP-213V1-432_NI_LF
E
AUDIO_OUT_R
1/4W
R8011
AUDIO_OUT_L
RF_CONV_A_OUT
FROM POWER
GND
+32V
AT+5.2V
SPDIF
2.6
H1
2
P.CON+10V
3.3
0
P.CON+6V
P.CON+9V
0
0 VIDEO MUTE SW
Q8003
KRC103SRTK
0
2.2K
0
MUTE SW
Q8006
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
3
P.CON+9V
REAR_A_IN_L
P.CON+5V
BUFFER
Q8004
KTA1266
V
L
SIF_OUT
100
C8013
R8015
100uH 0305
W808
270
50V 10 KA
L8009
P.CON+10V
AUDIO_OUT_L
AUDIO_OUT_R
AT+5.2V
4.7K 1/4W
POWER_MUTE-L
R8059
S801X
W800
R8014
MUTE SW
Q8007
KRA103SRTK
DVD_A_OUT_L
F
3.5
0
MTZJ10B-EIC
+32V
C8059
330 1/2W
DVD_A_OUT_R
0.1
H
Vcc
6.3V 470 YK
C8014
SIF_OUT
R8009
68
16V 4.7 KANP
5.3
D8001
C8005
5
1
6
0
R8010
100P CH
C8040_1 4.2
C303
2.0
U V
H1
3 2
H2
5
YUV OUT
J8007
MSP-213V1-652_NI_LF
D AUDIO DRIVER
Q8001
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
5.2
4
C317
0.1 F
DVD_Y
S801Y
R8028
1/4W
1K
0
V.OUT 17
20
5.1
AV SW IC
MM1501XNRE
3.5
BUFFER
AFT-S.CURVE
31.0
NC 16
5
0
0
IC8002
5.2
SDA
9.0
0
6
1SS133
D8006
4.7K
R8024
470K
SCL
0.2
TU 32V 15
R8021
D8005
1SS133
BAIAS
2.0
NC
A.OUT 13
MUTE SW
Q8002
KRC104SRTK
0
AUDIO MUTE
Q8008
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
P.CON+10V
22
SIF OUT 14
2
FSC
100P CH
2.0
AFT 12
MUTE SW
Q8010
KRA101SRTK
5.1
W847
B
R306
5.0
DATA 11
Y/C SEPA
J8008
DIN-409A
Vin1
0
8.4
Y
H1
5.1
D8004
REAR_A_IN_L
W879
2
CLOCK 10
1
AV SW IC
IC8005 MM1501XNRE
0
7.8
FROM/TO SYSCON
MUTE DET 0
Q8012
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
3
5.0
10P
C8056
0.1
F
AT+5.2V
ZERO
22K 1/4W
1K
R8027
0.01
NC
3
2
0
BUFFER
0
Q8021
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
100uH
AV_SW2
C302
C308
TU/REAR_V_IN
0
CH
4
Y
0
FROM/TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR
P.CON+9V
33P
C
0
SW_V_OUT
C307
0
BUFFER
Q8020
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
1K
100uH 0305
NC 9
R8026
TV/VCR
3.8
NC
8
15K 1.5K
22uH 0305
0
5
0
0.3
0
R302
R8034
1SS133
220P CH
P.CON+5V
C8033
5.0
0
0
0
Y/C_VIDEO_OUT
0
RF_CH_SW
L301
3
C8034
KA
BUFFER
Q8019
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
0
0
7
L8007
3.2
C309
3
25V 10
RF_CONV_A_OUT
L8008
2
NC 7
FSC
C318_1
0
CONTROL 4
V.IN
1K
25V 10 KA
6.3V 220 YK
+B
R304
6.3V 220 YK
33K
R301
18
CH
TU301
4
115-V-HA35ARE_G
19
C315_1
R8035
42
R8031
16V 22 KA 470
10K
R8039
150P CH
10K
R8042
R8004
5
R8025
330P CH
P.CON+5V
SYS_MUTE
C8050
C8051
B
0.0015
C8009
CD8001
2F0G1002
50V 33 YK
C8008
10K
C8038
C8044
330P
CH
C8049
R8029
6.8
10K
47K
R8049
0.0015
FFC
0.2
11.6
R8013
100K
470 YK
DVD_C
1
R8037
5.8
DVD_U
6
A.IN
12K
R8038
5.8
6.3V 470 YK
8
R8048
16V
5.8
7
C8036
GND
CVBS
6
50V 2.2 KA
U(B)
R8057
R8053
14
R8046
5
0
560 1/4W
16V 100
YK
GND
DVD_V
F
C8015_1
3.3K
13
C8063_1
16V 470 YK
C8062_1
R8023
V(R)
+
-
REAR_A_IN_R
GND
12
+
8
W881
SW
Q8022
KRC103SRTK
0
0
C8046
0.1
1
C8004_1
11
5.8
2
50V 4.7 KA
GND
AUDIO-L
5.8
470
16V 22 KA
25V 10 KA
9
10
330P
CH
3
C8043
16V 47
YK
R8030
VCC
AUDIO-R
5.8
4
AUDIO_AMP IC
IC8001 RC4580IDR
8
R8045
ZERO
0
DVD_RESET
ZERO
7
16
10K
12K
DVD RESET
R8041
10K
1.5K
C8037
C8032
6
DVD_POWER_CTL
R8055
15K
C8003_1
DVD-H
R8052
C8064
A_GND
Y(G)
5
15
C8045
R8050
4
47K
P-H/I-L
R8051
3
DVD_Y
33 1/4W
100K
GND
B
7
2
330P CH
R8047
150P CH
CP8001_1(CP8101_1)
IMSA-9604S-16C
1
DVD CVBS
50V 2.2 KA
56
C8065
P.CON+10V
C8035
FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO
DVD_C
8
4
PCB010
DME063
1
H-15
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
A
B
C
PIECES REPAREES PAR UN
ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
D
E
THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
1
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
F
G
H
H-16
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
OPERATION/DISPLAY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1
2
GND
CP653 (CP683)
52147-0210
TO OPERATION/LED
(VCR MT PCB)
V651
KEY-B
8
8
TOF-440EBHG-B16/B4
C600
F
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SEG1 SW
Q664
KRC103SRTK
0
1.9
3G/TV/VCR_LED
4G/VSC_LED
R673
R663
180
R670
4.0
H
2
NC
1
3
E
R668
B
2
FRONT_A_IN_L
SEG6 SW
Q657
KRC103SRTK
0
0.4
4.0
H
SEG7 SW
Q656
KRC103SRTK
3.1
0
180
R666
180
R667
180
4G SW
Q654
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
1.7
5.2
SEG_6
SEG_7
0
SEG_8
SEG_9
SEG_10
REM_IN
4.9
KEY-B
KEY-A
5
OS651
ROM-V338LO
4.9
Vout 1
0
GND 2
5.1
B+ 3
0
REM_IN
R651
100
AT+5.2V
TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR
1/4W
FRONT_A_IN_L
4G/VSC_LED
SEG_6
3G/TV/VCR_LED
SEG_5
SEG_4
2G/DUB/REC_LED
SEG_1
75
SEG_3
FRONT_V_IN
10 KA
SEG_2
1G/VCR/T-REC_LED
2
H
E
1
C656
25V
SEG_5
4.9
R664
E
1
R669
C655
820
4.9
SEG8 SW
Q655
KRC103SRTK
3.5
0
R665
3G SW
180
Q659
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
1.7
5.2
FRONT_A_IN_R
R676
4
180
SEG_4
FRONT_A_IN_R
10V 100 YK
SEG5 SW
Q658
KRC103SRTK
0
1.0
SEG_3
C652
1.1
6
SEG_2
5G SW
Q651
4.0
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
1.3
5.2
SEG_9
SEG4 SW
Q660
KRC103SRTK
0
SEG_1
SEG9 SW
Q653
4.0
KRC103SRTK
0.4
0
R661
R671
B
180
180
5G/CS/BS_LED
2G SW
Q661
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
5.2
1.7
R662
820
R672
5G/CS/BS_LED
SEG10 SW
Q652
KRC103SRTK
0.9
0
180
SEG_10
SEG3 SW
Q662
KRC103SRTK
0
0.4
820
R675
2G/DUB/REC_LED
3.0
FRONT AV JACK
VIDEO
J653
RCA-109-01
7
1G/VCR/T-REC_LED
5
470P
1
DVD_LED
C654
FRONT AV JACK
AUDIO L
J652
RCA-109-01
2
FROM/TO SYSCON
4.9
FRONT AV JACK
AUDIO R
J651
MSP-281V30-A
3
VCR_LED
4.0
470P
4
180
SEG2 SW
Q663
KRC103SRTK
0
0.4
4.0
6
5
R674
1G SW
Q665
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
5.2
1.7
4.9
6
SEG_8
KEY-B
7
820
2.0
8
SEG_7
7
820
0.1
TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP
4
FRONT_V_IN
FROM POWER
D656
LEM_VCC
1N4005-EIC
P.CON+5V
DVD_LED
YK
KEY-B
KEY-A
VCR_LED
AT+5.2V
AT+5.2V
GND
W807
C653
3
10V470
3
DVD LED SW
Q666
KRA103SRTK
0
R683
AT+5.2V
R678
2.7K
3.3K
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
1
H-17
A
B
KEY-A
2
3
PCB010
DME063
1
2
4
5
6
7
KEY-B
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
C
EVQ21505R
VCR/DVD(REC)
SW653
KEY-B
KEY-A
DVD LED
GND
VCR LED
AT+5.2V
NC
CP651_1(CP682)
IMSA-9604S-07F
FROM/TO OPERATION/LED
2
EVQ21505R
R677
EVQ21505R
5.2
CH DOWN
SW655
5.2
CH UP
SW654
220
D
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
E
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
F
G
1
H
H-18
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(VCR MT PCB)
C743
FROM OPERATION/DISPLAY
0.01
L702
22uH
W850
8
AUDIO_MUTE-H
FSC
B
P.CON+9V
SIF_OUT
8
16V 22 KA
B
B C759
C754
0.0047
0.01
C757
50V 4.7 KA
C750_1
C753 25V 10 KA
1 B
C747
40
39
38
66
67
37
C742
50V 2.2 KA
0.033 B
1
C715
R7014.7K C714
B
1
C707
B
1
C705
0.1 F
4.9
3.5
NC
3.0
29
28
2.3
39K
TP701
NC
HIFI ENV
P.CON+5V
5
22uH 0305
25
24
0.1
2.6
4.7
FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP
KA
FSC
B
R726
FROM_NORMAL_A
2.2K
TO_NORMAL_A
HF2
HF_COM
0.01
R727
B
470
4
HF1
21
18
19
B
AT+5.2V
P.CON+5V
P.CON+9V
GND
2.7
22 KA
FROM/TO SYSCON
20
2.7
2.7
0.01 B
REC_MUTE_H
C760
50V 4.7 KA
0.2
C758
5.0
25V 10 KA
C751
17
2.5
0.0047
HIFI_ENV.DET
HIFI_H.SW
AUDIO_MUTE-H
W821
3
SCL
SDA
ST_SELECT
KA
C756
6.3V 47
0.1 F
2
P.CON+5V
L704
REAR_A_IN_L
16
4.8
16V 22 KA
C755_1
15
2.5
C752
C702
14
2.7
1 B
13
2.5
C748
12
0
22uH
TO_NORMAL_A
22uH
L703
AT+5.2V
RF_CONV_A_OUT
40
P.CON+9V
L701
2
11
0
FROM POWER
HIFI_ENV.DET
C768
22uH 0305
R706
6.3V 47
KA
10
0
5.6K
560P CH
16V 100 YK
C741
0.1 F
C731
5.6K
F
C722
R714
C730
9
0.7
680P CH
8
0
R720
7
0.1
1/4W
6
5.1
47K
C733
2.5
0.022 B
C724
PCB010
DME063
1
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
C
0
2.3
50V
C762
16V
25V 10 KA
5
4
8.9
R719
3
2.5
FRONT_A_IN_L
2
0.1
C740_1
1
0.1
VREF
A GND
1.5K
C749
4.1
25V 10 KA
C708
330
2.3
C704
C763
R704
R708
0
27
70
72
L-CH
HI-FI/DEMODULATOR IC
IC701
LA72670BM-L-MPB-E
1K 1/4W
0.1
23
0
B
330
4.1
1
C721_1
R717
AUDIO_OUT_L
36
L705
REC-H
R721
25V 10 KA
PB AMP
1.8K
330
REC AMP
COMP
OUT
SEL
ALC
47K 1/4W
39
C720_1
MUTE
F
AUDIO_OUT_R
R716
KA
R731
R725
22
0.1
38
73
0.1
B
47
1/4W
1
6.3V
12K
C701
R723
KA
1
50V 4.7
0.1
C706 680P CH
B
0.1 F
REC-H
PB AMP
ENV
DET
DVD_A_OUT_L
C713
B
560P CH
1
2.5
C744
R722
C703
0
74
KA
75
1.8K
4
A
C766
2.5
F
C765
0.01
50V 4.7
76
12K 1/4W
0.1
C719
560P CH
1.5K
H-19
2.5
SDA
C764
C767
NOISE
DET
77
R707
R-CH
IN SEL
C711
R713
1
0
SCL
1K
78
5.6K
3
R-CH
BPF
MIX
79
R715
100 1/4W
4.8
26
0
R703
FROM_NORMAL_A
LIM
LPF
DO DET
71
R712
47K 1/4W
DVD_A_OUT_R
R-CH
BPF
COMP
VCO
R729
4.6
D.C
MATRIX
100 1/4W
4.7
1/4W
0
FRONT_A_IN_R
SAP
DET
R728
0.1
DEV
KA
0
LOGIC
1/4W
C771
16V 22
CH
0.2
L-R
DEMOD
80
47K
560P
0.7
KA C728
DEC
6
HIFI_H.SW
0.01 B
R702
REAR_A_IN_R
5
5.6K
C716
50V 4.7
C710
SAP
DEMOD
ST/SAP
SW
CONT
dbx
68
R711
KA
SW
NOISE
AUDIO_OUT_L
AUDIO_OUT_R
37
R724
1K
HOLD
PULSE
PILOT
CANCEL
69
16V 22
SAP
FILUTER
LIM
C725 50V 4.7 KA
0.4
STEREO
PLL
2.5
ST_SELECT
36
B
0.3
R-CH
PNR
RF_CONV_A_OUT
0.2
35
61
FILUTER
Adj.
DVD_A_OUT_R
34
0.1
C712
0.2
DVD_A_OUT_L
33
C718
1/4W
REAR_A_IN_R
SIF_OUT
A GND
PILOT
DET
STEREO
FILUTER
REAR_A_IN_L
32
0.2
R718
2.2M
SIF
DEMOD
B
49
FROM/TO TUNER/JACK
2.7 2.5 4.8
0.3 2.7
2.7 2.7 2.7
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
63
1
0.2
0
F
31
C723
64
B
0.1
RIPPLE
FILTER
VREF LIM
AMP
65
1
6
0
C746
0.3 1.5
3.8 3.8 8.9 0.4 0.1 0.4
0
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
62
C717
7
30
0.3
0
60
59
1/4W
50V 2.2 KA
B
C709
1
R710
390K
C727 50V 4.7
C726
KA
7
FRONT_A_IN_R
B
C735
B
0.01
C732
16V 100 KA
C739
FRONT_A_IN_L
D
E
F
G
H
H-20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(VCR MT PCB)
8
8
R533
220 1/4W
MTZJ11B-EIC
D514
D527
1N4005-EIC
C535
25V 10 KA
10K 1/2W
R534
W842
C505
16V 100 YK
VCR_POWER_ON-L
POWER_FAIL
AT+5V[M-CON]
VCR_POWER_ON-L
MOTOR_GND
P.CON+10V
TO OPERATION/DISPLAY
5
LEM_VCC
P.CON+5V SW
Q503
0 KTC3209_Y
TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR
P.CON+5V
16V100 YK
0
R511
F
1
C534
D523
C522
W804
M-CON POWER SW
Q506
KRC103SRTK
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
+32V
560K
3.3
W885
R523
27K
0.1
R517
50V 22 YK
4
AT+5V[M-CON]
M-CON +5V SW
4.4
Q504
KTA1271_Y
C520
1K 1/2W
AT+5.2V
GND
5.1
6.8K
C521
5.2
D516
MTZJ5.1B-EIC
P.CON+9V
AT+5.2V
10uH TSL0808
W877
150
R518
AT+5.2V
P.CON+5V
W827
5.6K
D522
W829
CP501_1 (CD4002)
A2001WV2-13P
W833
W886
AT+5.2V
AT+5.2V
R519
1
AT+5.2V
2
GND(D)
3
GND(D)
4
TX
5
RX
6
GND(M)
7
P.CON+6V
P.CON+A5V
8
UNREG+3.8V
10
1/4W
R554
P.CON+6V
10K
R552
R531
UNREG+3.8V
11
GND(A)
12
SPDIF
13
RX
P.CON+5V_DH
POWER_FAIL
470
R521
VOLTAGE CTL IC
IC501 KIA431A-AT
1/4W
C524
47K
1K
AT+3.8V
5.3
2
1
2.5
R522
0
MTZJ3.3B-EIC
0
POWER FAIL SW
Q513
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
9
2
B
0
3.2
C544
D526
C506
3
4.1
IN
W806
SPDIF
3
10V 100 YK
GND
3.3K +-1%
OUT
0
POWER FAIL SW
Q514
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
W832
R547
0
3.3K +-1%
10K
100K
AT+5.2V
TX
R553
D501
GND
1/2W
10K
R514
L506
1 F
0
0.6
P.CON+5V
GND
0.47 B
0
R532
C514
16V100 YK
C519
D519
C518
R527
220 1/4W
MTZJ6.8B-EIC
6.3V 2200 FM
D508
1SS133
1SS133
PROTECT CONTROL
Q507
KTC3203_Y
AT+5.2V
P.CON+6V
5.3
R520
100K 1/4W
25V 10 KA
470K 1/4W
+32V
DVD_POWER_CTL
0
1H3-E
R530
B
R509
100
4.1
0
AT+3.8V
R536
B
C527
0.001
10K
R507
B
C508
0.022
C512
R549
1SS133
2
0.022
D518
5.0
R515
5.1
1SS133
D504
0
MTZJ33B-EIC
0.3
1
D512
C510
100 1/4W
SR340-004
96
12.5
W826
9.0
SPDIF
P.CON5V SW
Q505
2SD1835S/T-AA
LEM_VCC
14
PHOTO COUPLER
IC503
PS2561AL1-1-V(W)
0
R508
390 1/2W
0
0
D511
15
2
D524
R524
PROTECT CONTROL
Q502
KTC3203_Y
HS6S
HS501
763WAAA070
4
SR340-004
16.6
4
0.018 M
0.3
3
13
3
0.5
2
D515_1
1SS133
MTZJ22B-EIC
D510
560
1
10V 2200 YK
C509
1/2W
R513
P.CON+5V
1SS133
R504
SW
C504
0
100
44
P.CON+9V
GND
12.9
2
6
TO TUNER/JACK
220
11
142.0
G
0.5
S 0.1
SWITCHING
Q501
2SK3563(ORION_Q)
AT+12.6_V
P.CON+5V
GND
OUT
16V 100 YK
W846
6
NC
0 3
D 0
3.9 3W
R535
10
139.3
0.22 1W
R516
16V 2200 YK
C501
7
W845
R506
0
NC
0
4
0.68 1W
19.1
1
D509
W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2
R505
R529
B501
16.0
43
R
AT+5.2V
100 1/4W
HS502
763WAAA120
HS6S
0
12
R502
P.ON SW
Q509
KRC103SRTK
0
IN
11.6
0
C525
RX
W841
P.CON+5V_DH
1M1/2W
5
2KV 680P
TX
D505
T501
81291244
7
FROM/TO SYSCON
P.CON+9V
6V REG. IC
IC502
KIA78R06API
8
3
W834
0
1N4005-EIC
L501
COIL,LINE FILTER
SS11VL-05230
2.5A125V
FH501
FH502
EYF-52BCY
EYF-52BCY
4
D533
1N4005-EIC
DVD_POWER_CTL
SARS01-V1
C515
500V 0.01 B
R512
PK
C513
2KV 100P R
4
200V 47
1N4005-EIC
3
68K 1W
PK
C511_1
D502
2
C540_1
1
680K 1/4W 680K 1/4W
BLACK
P.CON+10V
22uH 0305
FR155-F
500V 560P B
200V 47
R503
F501
51MS025L
S501
GND
P.CON+12V SW
Q510
2SD1835S/T-AA
10.4
12.4
L505
D507
KY
C531
1.5M 1/2W
ECQUL
BLACK
C502_1
S502
WHITE
P.CON+5V
250V
C526
C516
D503
275V 0.22
BLADE
WIDE
6
AT+12.6_V
11.1
W5T_20X10X10A
WHITE
W822
1N4005-EIC
250V 0.0022
L502
2.5A 125V
D529
D506
1N4005-EIC
AC120V_60HZ
CD501
09415911
TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP
W856
1N4005-EIC
3.3M
7
1/2W +-10%
R501
0.0022 KY
W816
PCB010
DME063
2.5A 125V
1
CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,
CAUTION :FOR
REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE 2.5A 125V(F501).
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
PIECES REPAREES PAR UN
ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE
ATTENTION :POUR
N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE 2.5A 125V(F501).
H-21
A
B
C
D
E
F
THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
1
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
G
H
H-22
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
OPERATION/LED SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
8
8
7
7
(OPERATION PCB)
R700
1/4W
2
1
R693
KEY-B
2.7K
VCR LED
D685
CP683 (CP653)
B2013H02-2P
GND
3.3K 1/4W
220 1/4W
R698
EVQ11L05R
POWER
SW699
EVQ11L05R
VCR EJECT
SW697
FROM OPERATION/DISPLAY
6
LTL-1CHGE-002A
(OPERATION2 PCB)
6
R697
5
5
12K 1/4W
PCB280
DEE081
EVQ11L05R
FF/CUE
SW687
EVQ11L05R
PLAY
SW686
EVQ11L05R
REW/REV
SW685
LTL-1CHGE-002A
DVD LED
D686
R691
R689
15K 1/4W
3.3K
FROM/TO OPERATION/DISPLAY
1/4W
(CP651_1) CP682
IMSA-9604S-07F
EVQ11L05R
R686
6.8K 1/4W
STOP
SW689
R699
13K 1/4W
AT+5.2V
7
VCR LED
6
DVD LED
GND
5
KEY-A
2
EVQ11L05R
VCR/DVD
SW691
EVQ11L05R
OPEN/CLOSE
SW690
4
KEY-B
1
4
3
NC
4
R692
1.5K 1/4W
CD682
2H070904
R695
33K 1/4W
PCB270
3
3
DEE080
2
2
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
1
H-23
A
B
C
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
D
E
1
F
G
H
H-24
A
B
C
D
8
E
F
G
H
8
LOADING MOTOR/SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
7
7
6
6
(LOADING MOTOR PCB)
(SW PCB)
5
CD2301
2H062102
1
4
CD2302
2H052601
5
SW2
ESE22MH24
4
3
GND(SW)
2
PICK UP INNER LIMIT SWITCH
3
4
FEED MOTOR (-)
5
SPINDLE MOTOR (-)
6
SPINDLE MOTOR (+)
M
FEED MOTOR (+)
M2602
BCZ3B03
5
SW1
SSS-13-2
SW-2(CLOSE)
GND(SW)
SW-1(OPEN)
2
LOADING MOTOR(+)
1
LOADING MOTOR(-)
M2603
M BCZ3B52
M
PCB640
DED002
M2601
JCV9B06
4
PCB610
DED003
3
3
2
2
THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
1
H-25
ARE
PIECES REPAREES PAR UN
ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
A
B
C
D
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
1
E
F
G
H
H-26
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
8
OPERATION2 PCB
PCB280
DEE081
8
OPERATION PCB
PCB270
DEE080
FULL ERASE HEAD ASS’Y
8
8
GND(DVD)
SSCCLK/TX
9
5
TX
RDY(I/O(0))/RX
9
9
9
LD(DVD)
8
6
RX
LD(CD)
10
10
10
LD(CD)
GND(M)
7
7
GND(M)
VOL(CD)
11
11
11
VOL(CD)
P.CON+6V
6
8
GND(CD)
12
12
12
GND(CD)
P.CON+A5V
5
9
P.CON+6V
P.CON+A5V
13
13
13
MON(COM)
UNREG+3.8V
DVD/CD
14
14
14
DVD/CD
UNREG+3.8V
3
11 UNREG+3.8V
RF
15
15
15
RF
GND(A)
2
12
GND(A)
C
16
16
16
C
SPDIF
1
13
SPDIF
B
17
17
17
B
A
18
18
18
A
D
19
19
19
D
F
20
20
20
F
GND(D)
2
GND(D)
OPEN
3
OPEN
LD+
4
LD+
LD-
5
LD-
SLED MOTOR
4
LOADING MOTOR
CP2303
FFC
SP1+
1
1
1
SP1+
SP1-
2
2
2
SP1-
SLD+
3
3
3
SLD+
SLD-
4
4
4
SLD-
LIMIT SW
5
5
5
LIMIT SW
SW(GND)
6
6
6
SW(GND)
FG SENSER
5
5
DVD-H
11
6
6
DVD RESET
ZERO
AUDIO-R
ZERO
10
10
7
7
AUDIO-R
9
9
8
8
GND
AUDIO-L
8
8
9
9
GND
7
7
10
10
AUDIO-L
GND
V(R)
6
6
11
11
GND
5
5
12
12
V(R)
GND
4
4
13
13
GND
U(B)
3
3
14
14
U(B)
GND
2
2
15
15
GND
CVBS
1
1
16
16
CVBS
+5V
1
+5V
USB_DN
2
USB_DN
3
3
USB_DN
USB_DP
3
USB_DP
2
2
USB_DP
GND
4
GND
1
1
GND
USB PCB
PCBDD0
DEF091
9
WHITE
9
9
9
HF COM
8
8
8
HF2 (L)
7
7
7
SP-CH1 (R)
6
6
6
SP COM
5
5
5
SP-CH2 (L)
4
4
4
EP/LP-CH1 (R)
3
3
3
EP/LP COM
2
2
2
EP/LP-CH2 (L)
1
1
1
HI-FI HEAD
SP HEAD
3
1
2
1
1
FE HEAD (HOT)
FE HEAD (GND)
2
EP/LP HEAD
NC
7
NC
S501 BLACK
4
3
2
1
5
2
H1
3
H2
5
REAR IN JACK
J8002
DVD AUDIO OUT
J8006
YUV OUT
J8007
E
E
1
4
4
H1
H1
5
E
1
H2
3
2
E
5
6
H1
E
1
3
2
FRONT AV JACK FRONT AV JACK
AUDIO IN R
AUDIO IN L
J651
J652
E
E
1
1
REAR OUT JACK
J8001
E
E
H1 NC H1 H2
4
E
1
2
H1
3
H2
4
5
H1
3
NC
2
H
H
2
FRONT AV JACK
VIDEO
J653
E
1
H
2
5
V.IN
4
CONTROL
3
+B
2
CH
1
A.IN
AUDIO REC
4
AUDIO PB
HEAD AUDIO CONTROL ASS’Y
H5001
CD102
FFC
CP102_1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
FPC
HF1 (R)
8 FSC
NC
S502 WHITE
18
HOTPLUG
GND
POWER
SDA
NC
SCL
CEC
CLK-S
CLK-
D0-S
D0-
CLK+
D0+
D1-S
D1-
D1+
D2-S
D2-
D2+
G
2
3
2
VCC
13 A.OUT
AC120V_60Hz
CD501
6
2
LOADING MOTOR
M101
10 CLOCK
Y/C SEPA
J8008
CP5901_3
O
3
3
H5002
KEY-B
1
4
4
4
15 TU 32V
2
1
1
NC
KEY-A
2
DVD LED
GND
3
VCR LED
5
5
5
5
4
AT+5.2V
CP682
6
6
6
CP103
16 NC
NC
NC
BLACK
HDMI CONNECTOR
WHITE
LM
4
4
4
AUDIO REC
3
3
3
3
AUDIO PB
CTL+
2
2
2
2
CTL+
CTL-
1
1
1
1
CTL-
AUDIO
2
CONTROL
VCR MT PCB
PCB010
DME063
19
+5V
4
5
11 DATA
BLADE
WIDE
5
4
12
CP101
12 AFT
5
CYL CTL
CYLINDER UNIT
17 V.OUT
DVD MT PCB
PCB130
DMF071
USB CONNECTOR
CP6603
+5V
12
CAPSTAN DD UNIT
M2001
4
3
+5V
11
TU301
NC
CP6601
CYL FG/PG
RED
14 SIF OUT
CP6602
11
1
12
11
10
7
CLOSE
12
LDM CTL
6
CP2302
1
DVD-H
DVD RESET
SPINDLE MOTOR
CLOSE
Y(G)
9
10
D-U OUT
GND(PDIC)
P-H/I-L
4
CAP CTL
D-V OUT
Vref
24
3
4
9
5
23
24
3
13
8
LD/CY VCO
D-W OUT
23
24
14
13
7
8
4
23
14
Y(G)
GND
D-COM
Vref
GND(PDIC)
P-H/I-L
6
7
3
VCC
5
MOTOR GND
M-GND
E
22
GND
4
I LIMIT
6
FFC
21
22
DVD CVBS
2
CAP.M/F/R
1
21
22
1
2
3
4
2
21
16
15
1
15
2
VCC
1
E
VCC
16
GND
CAP VCO
3
D-PG OUT
CP8101_1
CP8001_1
DVD CVBS
2
D-PG GND
5
1
5
10 UNREG+3.8V
CD8001
FFC
CAP FG
20
OPTICAL PICK-UP
4
7
CD682
FFC
1
1
6
CP3001 1
LD(DVD)
MON(COM)
MR
FG SENSOR
7
8
6
GND(D)
GND(DVD)
5
GND(D)
4
7
3
10
6
11
GND(D)
4
GND(D)
VOL(DVD)
5
NC(SW)
7
3
6
7
4
6
7
2
6
3
NC(SW)
VOL(DVD)
ROTOR
MAGNET
OUT
HALL HALL
SWITCH
VCC
IN
LOGIC
2
AT+5.2V
2
AT+5.2V
2
FE HEAD (GND)
1
12
1
13
AT+5.2V
F+
1
B+ 3
FE HEAD (HOT)
AT+5.2V
MON(DVD)
KEY-B
5
MAIN
COIL
OS651
GND 2
KEY-A
4
5
7
HALL
SENSOR
Vout
NC
4
5
TM601
21
6
4
MON(DVD)
CP501_1
DVD LED
GND
F+
DVD
DRIVE
DM-3S
CD4002_1
6
F-
VCR LED
T+
3
7
2
3
7
2
3
CP651_1
2
F-
AT+5.2V
T+
1
T-
KEY-B
1
2
1
GND
1
CP653
CP2301
T-
7
KEY-B
2
CD683
FFC
2
2
7
1
CP683
GND
COMMAND TRANSMITTER
1
1
PIECES REPAREES PAR UN
ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
NOTE: THIS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
H-27
A
B
C
D
E
ARE
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
F
G
H
H-28
WAVEFORMS
MPEG/MICON/DSP/FR_AMP
10ns
1.0V
1
200ns
20mV
2
5ns
200mV
3
Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP
10µs
PB
10µs
500mV
500mV
6
16
10µs
200mV
PB
100ns
100mV
7
17
PB
10µs
200mV
1ms
100mV
8
18
AUDIO/VIDEO
500µs
PB
10µs
200mV
200ms
500mV
1.0V
4
9
19
REC
10µs
500mV
50µs
1.0V
5
5µs
20V
10
20
NOTE: The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding
balloon number in the schematic diagram.
I-1
WAVEFORMS
SYSCON
PB
5ms
PB
5ms
PB
500µs
1.0V
2.0V
200mV
27
21
39
TUNER/JACK
PB
200µs
1.0V
PB
PB
500µs
10µs
200mV
22
200mV
32
40
Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR
POWER ON
50ns
1.0V
23
TUNER/JACK
PB
PB
10ms
1.0V
500µs
100mV
42
36
POWER
PB
500µs
1.0V
24
PB
1ms
PB
5µs
2.0V
500mV
43
37
PB
5ms
PB
500µs
PB
5µs
500mV
200mV
5.0V
25
44
38
NOTE: The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding
balloon number in the schematic diagram.
I-2
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
205
205
205
205
211
207
211
126
207
110
120
114
110
205
123
209
PCB130
(DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)
208
209
117
208
213
202
106
111
124
109
103
202
102
214
214
104
125
PCBDD0
(USB PCB ASS'Y)
116
115
105
104
203
108
206
203
210
112
PCB010
(VCR MT PCB ASS'Y)
204
107
121
204
PCB280
(OPERATION 2 PCB ASS'Y)
207
212
122
207
202
101D
119
101O
101H
118
119
101G
101L
101K
122
101I
202
101N 101F
201
101Q
113
101J
101M
101C
202
207
101P 101B
101J
101E
101A
101P
PCB270
(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)
101
J1-1
127
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
(PACKING DIAGRAM)
132
133, 134, 135, 136
128
CD6002, CD6003,
TM601
130
128
131
129
J1-2
CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW (TOP VIEW)
505
503
300
CD1501
M2003
319
503
UN4001
333
334
504
501
335
H5002
342
H5001
336
314
324
341
317
503
315
306
323
331
508
508
305
322
301
AA
312
313
AA
332
AA
AA
AA
AA
CD1502
M101
304
325
309
AA
AA 307
AA
AA
506
345
302
AA
AA
507
316
AA
318
321
510
AA
AA
AA
CLASS
GREASE
MARK
AA
NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
J2-1
AA
CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW (BOTTOM VIEW)
303
300
501
M2001
320
CD1501
502
AA
CD1502
339
338
AA
502
AA
502
AA
329
337
AA
AA
AA
509
AA
340
AA
311
310
AA
308
AA
344
327
343
AA
326
AA
328
AA
505
330
CLASS
GREASE
MARK
AA
NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
J2-2
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW
611
600
608
612
Cannot supply separately.
If the repair is needed, replace the
LOADER SUB ASS'Y.
AA
704
610
614
AA
AA
AA
AA
AA
613
AA
602
AA
AA
609
AA
615
M2603
607
SW1
AA
PCB610
(LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y)
705
617
616
CD2301
701
CD2302
604
705
SW2
618
702
PCB640
(SW PCB ASS'Y)
CD2001
703
606
605
Do not replace the parts. Because,
minute adjustments are needed if
this condition is disassembled
further more.
If the repair is needed, replace the
DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
603
M2602
605
601
CLASS
MARK
GREASE
AA
NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
J3-1
619
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.
TSB P/N
Reference No.
Description
101
101A
101B
101C
101D
101E
101F
101G
101H
101I
101J
101K
101L
101M
101N
101O
101P
101Q
AE008288
AE008289
AE008166
AE008167
AE008168
AE008171
AE001847
AE008290
AE008291
AE008172
AE008292
AE008176
AE008177
AE008178
AE008179
AE001848
AE004701
AE001324
7A7010188A
701WPJ1409
711WPDA693
712WPJC212
712WPJC213
723000D250
7235490018
736WPB0020
736WPB0021
736WPAA010
736WPB0023
736WPBA013
736WPBA014
736WPBA015
738WPAA072
743WKA0042
800WFAA015
742WKA0001
FRONT CABI ASS'Y
CABINET FRONT
PLATE DISPLAY
FLAP DVD
FLAP VCR
SHEET LED
BADGE BRAND
BUTTON FRAME 1
BUTTON FRAME 2
BUTTON FRAME 3
BUTTON FRAME 4
BUTTON RING 1
BUTTON RING 2
BUTTON RING 3
STOPPER BUTTON
SPRING FLAP
CUSHION LEG
SPRING DVD-FLAP
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
BZ710466
BZ710331
BZ710498
AE006652
AE006653
AE008293
AE008294
BZ710659
752WSA0230
753WUAA006
85OP700038
701WPA1363
701WPA1364
702WSA0273
7230008089
752WSA0290
SHIELD CASE H/AMP
SPRING EARTH H/AMP
HOLDER END SENSOR
HOLDER DECK
HOLDER DECK
PLATE BOTTOM
SHEET JACK
SHIELD COMPO
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
AE003509
AE004703
AE007201
AE008181
AE006725
AE008728
AE008180
AE008243
79091466
AE001852
753WUA0065
761WPA0321
761WPA0406
761WSAA040
702WSA0241
722549A617
752WUAA005
761WPAA137
761WPA0261
8965TS1010
SPRING EARTH
HOLDER DVD BL
COVER PCB
ANGLE FRONT
CABINET TOP
SHEET RATING
SHIELD JACK
HOLDER DECK TOP
HOLDER DVD BR
CUSHION 65TS10-10(10*10*25)
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
AE001853
AE005122
AE007416
AE008297
AE008298
AE008299
AE005385
AE008300
AE006733
AE008729
8965TS1017
726000A073
800WFA0074
752WSA0581
753WUA0081
761WPA0425
8965TS1015
7230007876
792WHA0603
793WCDD226
CUSHION 65TS10-10(17.5*20*14)
SHEET CAUTION
CUSHION LEG
SHIELD HDMI
SHIELD USB
HOLDER USB
CUSHION 65TS10-5(10*5*15)
SHEET 20*20*T0.1
PACKAGE BACK
GIFT BOX
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
AD301577
AE008182
AE008730
AE007590
AE008731
AE008732
AE007852
791WHA0100
792WHAA187
A2I403H975
JB5ND300
J2I40301A
J2I40310A
J5N00629A
GIFT SHEET
PACKAGE FRONT
INSTRUCTION BOOK KIT
POLYBAG INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)
INSTRUCTION BOOK(E)
INSTRUCTION BOOK(F)
INFORMATION SHEET(CND)
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
AE008246
AE007202
AE003524
AE003526
AE004724
AE005539
AE003530
AE005541
AE005537
8110E2606U
810923053U
8109I30A0U
810923080U
8109K3060U
810713040U
811022680U
810F13080U
8154D3033U
SCREW TAP TITE(P)WH10 M2.6*6 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) R BIND 3*5.3 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND(3D) 3*6 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(S) PAN 3*4 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6*8 CH
SEMS(F)
3*8 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH8 3*33R CH
210
211
212
213
214
AE005540
AE006673
AE007212
AE003529
AE008305
810722660U
8109130B7U
810213060U
811063080U
8146230F5U
SCREW TAP TITE(S) BIND 2.6*6 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B)R PAN 3*27 CH
SCREW PAN M3*6 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*8 CH
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) R-BIND 3*4.2+4*2.3 CH
K1-1
CHASSIS REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.
!
!
!
!
TSB P/N
Reference No.
Description
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
AE008141
AE005514
AE006679
BZ710193
BZ710515
AE005919
BZ710112
AE006676
BZ710517
AE005920
A2F403H420K
85OA400245
85OP900759
85OP200290
85OP600581
85OP500091
85OP800324
85OA000529
85OA200089
85OA200092
DECK ASSY A2F403H420K
PINCH ROLLER BLOCK VA2
LEVER,FLAP(S)
BELT,CAPSTAN (S)
WORM
BASE,AC HEAD
SPRING,AC HEAD
MAIN CHASSIS ASS'Y(S)
CLUTCH ASS'Y
ARM IDLER ASS'Y
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
AE005836
AE005837
BZ710521
AE005838
AE005839
BZ710524
AE006677
BZ710552
BZ710106
AE006678
85OA300068
85OA300070
85OA400223
85OA400249
85OA400248
85OA400231
85OA900236
85OP900745
85OP700035
85OP900756
LOADING ARM S UNIT
LOADING ARM T UNIT
INCLINED BASE T UINT 3S
P5 ARM ASS'Y 2
TENSION ARM ASS'Y 2
INCLINED BASE S UNIT
CASS HOLDER ASS'Y(S)
CASS,OPENER
REFLECTOR,LED
BRACKET,TOP(S)
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
AE007221
AE005842
BZ710531
BZ710532
BZ710533
BZ710534
BZ710535
BZ710536
BZ710537
BZ710538
85OP400554
85OA900233
85OP000496
85OP200316
85OP200317
85OP200308
85OP200311
85OP200312
85OP200313
85OP300194
HOLDER,CAPSTAN
LINK UNIT
POST,CASS GUIDE
REEL,S (S)
REEL,T (S)
GEAR,IDLER
GEAR,CLUTCH
GEAR,COUPLING
LEVER,CLUTCH
GEAR,MAIN LOADING
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
BZ710092
BZ710093
BZ710366
BZ710762
BZ710540
BZ710541
BZ710763
BZ710543
BZ710544
AE005843
85OP400490
85OP400492
85OP400520
85OP400542
85OP400533
85OP600573
85OP600584
85OP600577
85OP600578
85OP600585
LEVER,TENSION
HOLDER,TENSION
CAP.P4
BAND,TENSION
CONNECT,TENSION
ARM,BRAKE T
BAND,BRAKE T
CAM,PINCH ROLLER
CAM,MAIN
ROD,MAIN
340
341
342
343
344
345
BZ710546
BZ710110
BZ710547
BZ710548
BZ710549
AE005844
85OP600582
85OP800322
85OP800360
85OP800355
85OP800356
85OP900754
GEAR,JOINT
SPRING,TENSION
SPRING,BRAKE T
SPRING,COUPLING
SPRING,RING
LEVER,LINK
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
AE005845
AE005846
AE005847
AE005848
AE005849
AE005850
AE005851
BZ710056
BZ710054
810722680U
83ETW3000U
810722640U
810212060U
810912660U
810A13040U
810A12650U
82Q264713N
82P184505N
SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND M2.6*8 CH
E-RING
3.0
SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND M2.6*4 CH
SCREW,PAN
M2*6 CH
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) PAN M2.6*6 CH
SCREW/WASHER(A)
M3*4 CH
SCREW/WASHER(A)
M2.6*5 CH
POLYSLIDER WASHER
2.6*4.7*T0.13
POLYSLIDER WASHER(CUT) 1.8*4.5*T0.5
510
AE005540
810722660U
SCREW TAP TITE(S) BIND 2.6*6 CH
CD1501
CD1502
H5001
H5002
M101
M2001
M2003
UN4001
BZ614292
BZ614339
AE004714
AD301676
AE005552
AE005853
AE006792
AE008130
122H071704
122Y021902
1523Q91004
1543Q02014
1596S98002
1510S98044
1589S11025
A2F3PDH500
CORD JUMPER
2H071704
CORD JUMPER
2Y021902
HEAD,AUDIO CONTROL VTR-1X2RPE22-772
HEAD (FULL ERASE)
VTR-1X2ERS11-154
MOTOR,LOADING
MDB2B66B
CAPSTAN DD UNIT
F2QVB73B
MICRO MOTOR
I20AL34K
CYLINDER UNIT ASS'Y A2F3PDH500
K2-1
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.
TSB P/N
Reference No.
Description
! 600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
AE008191
AE005003
AE003550
AE003551
AE003537
AE003538
AE003539
AE006115
AE003541
AE003542
A2I301H650
92P100109A
92P100094A
92P100088A
92AAA0013A
92P200013A
92P200014A
92SBB0029A
92P100095A
92P100097A
DVD MECHA ASS'Y A2I301H650
HOLDER,TRAVERSE
CLAMPER
GEAR,MOTOR
FEED RACK ASS'Y
INSULATOR(F)
INSULATOR(R)
LOADER SUB ASS'Y
GEAR,PULLEY
PULLEY,MOTOR
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
AE003549
AE005810
AE003545
AE003546
AE003547
AE003548
AE003535
AE003536
AE003543
BZ710149
92P100096A
92P200015A
92P000014A
92P100093A
92P100091A
92P100092A
92P100089A
92P100090A
92P300020A
800WFAA008
GEAR,MAIN
BELT,LOADING
PLATE,CLAMPER
RACK,LOADING
FRAME,MAIN
TRAY
RACK,FEED 1
RACK,FEED 2
SPRING,RACK FEED
CUSHION C
701
702
703
704
705
AE003530
AE003554
AE003555
AE003556
AE003557
811022680U
814011723U
816112080U
814011730U
811022080U
SCREW TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6*8 CH
SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH
SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH
SCREW,PAN M1.7*3 P3 CH
SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH
AE008247
AE003558
AE003559
AE005930
AE005931
AE003562
AE008143
AE003564
AE003565
122J4O1903
122H062102
122H052601
1515S98003
1596S18003
A5M4016610
A5N813W640
0515S32002
0500101037
CORD JUMPER
127000-2928
CORD JUMPER
2H062102
CORD JUMPER
2H052601
FEED MOTOR
BCZ3B03B
MOTOR,LOADING
BCZ3B52B
LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y
DED003A
SW PCB ASS'Y
DED002B
SWITCH
SSS-13-2
PUSH SWITCH
ESE22MH24
CD2001
CD2301
CD2302
! M2602
! M2603
PCB610
PCB640
SW1
SW2
K3-1
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
TSB P/N
Reference No.
Description
RESISTORS
R501
R502
R503
R504
R512
R516
R517
R535
BZ210219
BZ210058
BZ210206
AE000145
AE008325
AE005735
BZ210180
AE000037
R0G3K2335K
R3X181R68J
R002T2155J
R002T2561J
R3K581683J
R63881R22J
R002T2102J
R3X28B3R9J
RC
R,METAL OXIDE
RC
RC
R,METAL OXIDE
R,FUSE
RC
R,METAL
! C501
! C502
C504
! C505
! C511
C513
! C514
! C515
! C516
! C518
! C519
! C522
C525
! C526
! C531
! C540
BZ110119
BZ110025
BZ110076
AD301535
BZ110186
AE000599
AD301535
AE001722
BZ110256
AE004691
AD301535
BZ110205
BZ110172
BZ110256
AE001723
BZ110186
E02LF2222M
P2122B224M
E02LF1222M
E02LU2101M
E62QFC470M
C0PLRR712K
E02LU2101M
C0J0B0514K
CC3LE0MH3M
E61FF0222D
E02LU2101M
E02LU5220M
C03L0R7U2K
CC3LE0MH3M
C0JTB05S2K
E62QFC470M
CE
CMP
CE
CE
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
D501
D502
D503
D504
D505
D506
D507
D508
D509
D510
D511
D512
D514
D515
D516
D518
D519
D522
D523
D524
D526
D527
D529
D533
D656
D685
D686
D2303
D2304
D3001
D3002
D3007
D3009
D4002
D4003
D4004
D4005
D5901
D5902
D5903
D6601
D8001
D8004
D8005
D8006
D8111
D8112
BZ410006
BZ410085
BZ410085
BZ410006
BZ410085
BZ410085
AE008220
BZ410006
AE002133
AE006706
AE008248
BZ410006
AE008320
AE008248
AE006709
BZ410006
AE006710
AE008319
AE006707
BZ410006
AE006708
BZ410085
BZ410085
BZ410085
BZ410085
AD301537
AD301537
BZ410086
BZ410086
AD301638
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410086
BZ410086
BZ410086
BZ410086
BZ410086
AE004937
AE004937
AE008321
AE008193
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410086
BZ410086
D1VT001330
D2WXN40050
D2WXN40050
D1VT001330
D2WXN40050
D2WXN40050
D2LXFR1550
D1VT001330
D2BXARS010
D9WU02202B
D2LKSR3400
D1VT001330
D9WU01102B
D2LKSR3400
D9WU05R12B
D1VT001330
D9WU06R82B
D4AT01H3E0
D9WU03302B
D1VT001330
D9WU03R32B
D2WXN40050
D2WXN40050
D2WXN40050
D2WXN40050
0021E5Q210
0021E5Q210
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
0010E00330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
D77R1A1R10
D77R1A1R10
DD7RB051L0
D9WU01002B
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SCHOTTKY
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SCHOTTKY
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,RECTIFIER
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
LED
LED
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
INFRARED LED
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,VARISTA
DIODE,VARISTA
DIODE,SCHOTTKY
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
IC101
AE005890
I03F3206ME
IC
3.3M OHM 1/2W
0.68 OHM 1W
1.5M OHM 1/2W
560 OHM 1/2W
68K OHM 1W
0.22 OHM 1W
1K OHM 1/2W
3.9 OHM 3W
CAPACITORS
2200 UF 16V
0.22 UF 275V ECQUL
2200 UF 10V
100 UF 16V
47 UF 200V
100 PF 2KV R
100 UF 16V
0.01 UF 500V B
0.0022UF 250V
2200 UF 6.3V
100 UF 16V
22 UF 50V
680 PF 2KV R
0.0022UF 250V
560 PF 500V B
47 UF 200V
DIODES
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
1SS133T-77
1N4005-EIC
1N4005-EIC
1SS133T-77
1N4005-EIC
1N4005-EIC
FR155-F
1SS133T-77
SARS01-V1
MTZJ22B-EIC
SR340-004
1SS133T-77
MTZJ11B-EIC
SR340-004
MTZJ5.1B-EIC
1SS133T-77
MTZJ6.8B-EIC
1H3-E
MTZJ33B-EIC
1SS133T-77
MTZJ3.3B-EIC
1N4005-EIC
1N4005-EIC
1N4005-EIC
1N4005-EIC
LTL-1CHGE-002A
LTL-1CHGE-002A
1SS355 TE-17
1SS355 TE-17
LTE-3271T-012A-O
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS355 TE-17
1SS355 TE-17
1SS355 TE-17
1SS355 TE-17
1SS355 TE-17
AVRL161A1R1NT
AVRL161A1R1NT
RB051L-40_TE25
MTZJ10B-EIC
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS355 TE-17
1SS355 TE-17
ICS
LA71206M-MPB-E
K4-1
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.
TSB P/N
Reference No.
Description
ICS
! IC501
! IC502
! IC503
IC701
! IC2301
IC3001
IC3003
IC3099
IC4001
! IC4003
! IC4004
IC4005
IC4007
IC6601
IC8001
IC8002
IC8005
IC8102
AD302211
AE001070
AE002809
AE004692
AE008194
AE008195
AD301641
AE008724
AE008323
AE007825
AE007825
AE008324
AE008725
AE008322
AE006711
AD301988
AD301988
AE003584
I1KJ9A431A
I1KA98R06A
000220002W
I03F670BM0
I03FV65650
I54F50157B
I9UF032310
A2I401H015
ICQK068880
I07F0C0WF0
I07F0C0WF0
IF9J0164AG
S2I401HF02
I4UF097020
I04J045800
I0UF015010
I0UF015010
I17F017530
IC
IC
PHOTO COUPLER
IC
IC
IC
IC
INIT DATA
IC
IC
IC
IC
MEMORY DATA
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
Q101
Q102
Q103
Q104
Q105
Q107
Q109
Q501
Q502
Q503
Q504
Q505
Q506
Q507
Q509
Q510
Q513
Q514
Q651
Q652
Q653
Q654
Q655
Q656
Q657
Q658
Q659
Q660
Q661
Q662
Q663
Q664
Q665
Q666
Q2301
Q2302
Q2303
Q2304
Q2305
Q3001
Q3002
Q3003
Q3004
Q3005
Q3006
Q3007
Q3008
Q5901
Q5902
Q5903
Q5904
Q5905
Q8001
Q8002
Q8003
Q8004
BZ510109
BZ510109
BZ510072
BZ510070
BZ510073
BZ510108
BZ510109
AE002251
BZ510070
BZ510105
BZ510077
AE006717
BZ510067
BZ510070
BZ510067
AE006717
BZ510109
BZ510109
BZ510108
BZ510067
BZ510067
BZ510108
BZ510067
BZ510067
BZ510067
BZ510067
BZ510108
BZ510067
BZ510108
BZ510067
BZ510067
BZ510067
BZ510108
BZ510072
AE008330
AE008331
BZ510109
BZ510109
BZ510109
BZ410107
BZ410107
BZ510072
BZ410106
BZ410106
BZ410097
BZ510067
BZ410097
BZ510109
BZ510057
BZ510109
BZ510113
BZ510113
BZ510109
BZ510088
BZ510067
BZ510073
TCAA3875SY
TCAA3875SY
TPAAC05002
TCAT032034
TAATA12660
TAAA1504SY
TCAA3875SY
T25F035630
TCAT032034
TCAT03209Y
TAAT012714
TD3T018350
TNAAC05002
TCAT032034
TNAAC05002
TD3T018350
TCAA3875SY
TCAA3875SY
TAAA1504SY
TNAAC05002
TNAAC05002
TAAA1504SY
TNAAC05002
TNAAC05002
TNAAC05002
TNAAC05002
TAAA1504SY
TNAAC05002
TAAA1504SY
TNAAC05002
TNAAC05002
TNAAC05002
TAAA1504SY
TPAAC05002
TAAA1505SY
TAAA1544T0
TCAA3875SY
TCAA3875SY
TCAA3875SY
0002700690
0002700690
TPAAC05002
0002700680
0002700680
0000M00390
TNAAC05002
0000M00390
TCAA3875SY
TAAT01281Y
TCAA3875SY
T27T030180
T27T030180
TCAA3875SY
TNAAD05001
TNAAC05002
TAATA12660
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
FET
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
PHOTO COUPLER
PHOTO COUPLER
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
PHOTO COUPLER
PHOTO COUPLER
PHOTO TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
PHOTO TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
FET
FET
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
KIA431A-AT
KIA78R06API
PS2561AL1-1-V(W)
LA72670BM-L-MPB-E
LA6565VR-TLM-E
OEC0157B
PST3231NR
BR24L02F-WE2
ZR36888HLCG
BA00BC0WFP-E2
BA00BC0WFP-E2
M12L64164A-7TG
SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
RT9702-PB
RC4580IDR
MM1501XNRE
MM1501XNRE
PCM1753DBQR
TRANSISTORS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
K4-2
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KRA103SRTK
KTC3203_Y-AT
KTA1266-AT(Y,GR)
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
2SK3563(ORION_Q)
KTC3203_Y-AT
KTC3209_Y-AT
KTA1271_Y-AT
2SD1835S/T-AA
KRC103SRTK
KTC3203_Y-AT
KRC103SRTK
2SD1835S/T-AA
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KRC103SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KRC103SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KRC103SRTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KRC103SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KRA103SRTK
KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P
KTA1544T-RTK/P
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
RPI-303
RPI-303
KRA103SRTK
RPI-352C40N
RPI-352C40N
ST-304L
KRC103SRTK
ST-304L
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTA1281_Y
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
2SK3018T106
2SK3018T106
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KRC104SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KTA1266-AT(Y,GR)
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.
TSB P/N
Reference No.
Description
TRANSISTORS
Q8005
Q8006
Q8007
Q8008
Q8009
Q8010
Q8011
Q8012
Q8019
Q8020
Q8021
Q8022
BZ510109
BZ510109
BZ510072
BZ510109
BZ510109
BZ510107
BZ510067
BZ510109
BZ510108
BZ510108
BZ510108
BZ510067
TCAA3875SY
TCAA3875SY
TPAAC05002
TCAA3875SY
TCAA3875SY
TPAAA05001
TNAAC05002
TCAA3875SY
TAAA1504SY
TAAA1504SY
TAAA1504SY
TNAAC05002
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
L101
L102
L103
L104
L107
L301
! L501
L502
L505
L506
L701
L702
L703
L704
L705
L3003
L4001
L5901
L5902
L5903
L5904
L8001
L8002
L8004
L8007
L8008
L8009
L8101
L8102
L8103
L8104
L8105
! T501
AE004672
BZ310041
AE002102
BZ310039
BZ310039
BZ310039
AE004671
AD301539
BZ310039
AD301785
BZ310183
BZ310183
BZ310039
BZ310039
BZ310039
AE000773
BZ310191
AE008306
AE008306
AE008306
AE008306
BZ310147
BZ310147
AE002183
BZ310041
BZ310041
BZ310041
AE000828
AE000828
AE000828
AE000828
AE000828
AE004673
031626010R
02167F101J
021LA65R6K
02167F220J
02167F220J
02167F220J
029X000117
02AHB0A0A4
02167F220J
02167E100K
021LA6220J
021LA6220J
02167F220J
02167F220J
02167F220J
021LA6120J
02167F2R2J
02D6000073
02D6000073
02D6000073
02D6000073
021LA6R33M
021LA6R33M
021LA6470J
02167F101J
02167F101J
02167F101J
02167F1R0K
02167F1R0K
02167F1R0K
02167F1R0K
02167F1R0K
0481291244
COIL,BIAS OSC
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL,LINE FILTER
CORE,FERRITE
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL,CHOKE
COIL,CHOKE
COIL,CHOKE
COIL,CHOKE
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING
J651
J652
J653
J8001
J8002
J8006
J8007
J8008
AE006693
AE008151
AE008151
AE002758
AE002759
AE002760
AE002761
AE008152
060J421038
060R401119
060R401119
060J411031
060J431020
060J411033
060J411032
063R700013
RCA JACK
RCA JACK
RCA JACK
RCA JACK
RCA JACK
RCA JACK
RCA JACK
JACK
SW653
SW654
SW655
SW685
SW686
SW687
SW689
SW690
SW691
SW697
SW699
SW3001
BZ612010
BZ612010
BZ612010
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
BZ612016
0504101T34
0504101T34
0504101T34
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0508S11001
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH (LEAF)
PCB010
PCB130
PCB270
PCB280
PCBDD0
AE008726
AE008727
AE008316
AE008317
AE008318
A2I403H010
A2I403H130
A2I401H270
A2I401H280
A2I401HDD0
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KRA103SRTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KRA101SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KRC103SRTK
COILS &TRANSFORMERS
1626010
100 UH
5.6 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
SS11VL-05230
W5T_20X10X10A
22 UH
10 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
12 UH
2.2 UH
ACM2012H-900-2P-T
ACM2012H-900-2P-T
ACM2012H-900-2P-T
ACM2012H-900-2P-T
0.33 UH
0.33 UH
47 UH
100 UH
100 UH
100 UH
1 UH
1 UH
1 UH
1 UH
1 UH
81291244
JACKS
MSP-281V30-A
RCA-109-01
RCA-109-01
MSP-213V1-432_NI_LF
MSP-213V2-432_NI_LF
MSP-213V1-732_NI_LF
MSP-213V1-652_NI_LF
DIN-409A
SWITCHES
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
LSA-1144EAU
P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES
VCR MT PCB ASS'Y
DVD MT PCB ASS'Y
OPERATION PCB ASS'Y
OPERATION 2 PCB ASS'Y
USB PCB ASS'Y
K4-3
DME063A
DMF071A
DEE080A
DEE081A
DEF091A
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No.
B501
B2301
B2302
B2303
B2304
B4001
B4002
B4003
B4004
B4005
B4006
B4007
B4008
B4009
B4010
B4011
B4012
B4013
B4015
B4016
B4017
B4019
B4020
B4021
B4022
B5901
B6601
B6602
B8001
B8103
BT601
CD102
CD103
! CD501
CD682
CD683
CP101
CP102
CP103
CP501
CP651
CP653
CP682
CP683
CD4002
CD6002
CD6003
CD6601
CD8001
CP2301
CP2302
CP2303
CP3001
CP5901
CP6601
CP6602
CP6603
CP8001
CP8101
! F501
FH501
FH502
OS651
OS8001
TM601
! TU301
V651
X101
X3001
X4001
TSB P/N
BZ310122
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE004602
AE004602
AE007391
AE005476
AE008217
AE004682
AE007029
AE007346
AE008163
AE007029
BZ614011
AE004674
AD301649
BZ614420
AE008153
AE008157
AE008153
AD301649
AE008310
AE001243
AE006433
AE008309
AE008313
AE008156
AE005934
AE005935
BZ614289
AE008307
BZ614440
BZ614440
AE008308
AE008155
AE008154
AE001715
AE002634
AE002634
AE008160
AE008312
AE008311
AE008150
AE008149
AE001717
AE004679
AE008161
Reference No.
024HT03563
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
024HC36001
024HC36001
024AC5102F
0246C51024
141U004016
122F041508
W9L6012042
1209415911
122H070904
W9L6012042
0697290620
069J740599
067U002019
069S2D0629
069J770589
069R220589
069J770589
067U002019
06CH2D1101
06CPL02006
06CPBA2006
06CH251805
122F0G1002
069KYOT159
069EV53030
069EV63030
06972C0010
0694YJ3018
069S250639
069S250639
069LAA1005
069J7G0599
069J7G0589
081PC2R505
06710T0009
06710T0009
077A037013
07AA000011
076D0LM030
0162300047
0040N54011
100DT3R528
100GT01006
100GT02720
Description
MISCELLANEOUS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
BATTERY,MANGAN
CORD,JUMPER
FLAT CABLE
CORD,AC BUSH
CORD,JUMPER
FLAT CABLE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
WIRE HOLDER
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
WIRE HOLDER
CORD,CONNECTOR
CABLE
CORD,RCA PIN
CORD,CONNECTOR
CORD,JUMPER
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
FUSE
HOLDER,FUSE
HOLDER,FUSE
REMOTE RECEIVER
OPTICAL DEVICE
TRANSMITTER
RF UNIT
LED DISPLAY
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
K4-4
W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
HCB2012K-600T25
HCB2012K-600T25
BLM18BD102SN1D
MMZ1608R102CT
MNAAA(R03)
2F041508
AWM2468 AWG26 2C BLACK 120MM
9415911
2H070904
AWM2468 AWG26 2C BLACK 120MM
TOC-C09X-A1
IMSA-9604S-04C
B2013H02-2P
A2001WV2-13P
IMSA-9604S-07F
52147-0210
IMSA-9604S-07F
B2013H02-2P
CH2D1101
CPL02006
TD-OR0201R
CH251805
2F0G1002
LD07T2-24ND-03
00_6232_005_006_800+
00_6232_006_006_800+
TMC-J12P-B2
1903015-3
A2001WR2-5P
A2001WR2-5P
C33F-004-5079A
IMSA-9604S-16C
IMSA-9604S-16F
51MS025L
EYF-52BCY
EYF-52BCY
ROM-V338LO
RFT5CB1
ORD204UC505913-J
115-V-HA35ARE G
TOF-440EBHG-B16/B4
HC-49/U
B10000C001
B27000C005
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
RESISTOR
RC................... CARBON RESISTOR
CAPACITORS
CC................... CERAMIC CAPACITOR
CE................... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR
CP................... POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CPP................. POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR
CPL................. PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMP................ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CMPL.............. METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMPP.............. METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR
K4-5
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project